Brosur EDIBON Lab Teknik Elektro PDF

Summarized
Catalogue
(2)
two (2)
Electronics
Communications
Electricity
Energy
Systems & Automatics
Process Control
Technical Teaching Equipment
www.edibon.com
Edition: ED01/08
Date: December/2008
complete range
Page 2
INDEX
Summarized
Catalogue
two (2)
2. Electronics page 4
2.1. Basic Electronics. 5-12

2.2. Electronics Kits. 13-17
2.3. Transducers and Sensors. 18-23
2.4. Control Electronics. 24
2.5. Digital Electronics. 25
2.6. Industrial Electronics. 26-28
3. Communications page 29
3.1. Analog Communications &

3.2. Digital Communications. 30-34
3.3. Telephony. 35
3.4. Global Positioning Systems (GPS) 35
4. Electricity page 36
4.1. Basic Electricity. 37-56

4.2. Electricity Demonstration. 56
4.3. Electrical Installations Workshop. 56
4.4. Electrical Machines. 57-71
4.5. Electrical Machines Kits. 72
5. Energy page 73
5.1. Energy Simulation. 74

5.2. Energy Power Plants. 75-76
5.3. Alternative Energies. 77-79
5.4. Relays Units. 80-82
6. Systems & Automatics page 83
6.1. Systems. 84
6.2. Automatics. 85-87
6.3. Regulation and Control. 88
10. Process Control page 89
10.1. Process Control Fundamentals. 90-94

10.2. Industrial Process Control. 95
Page 3 www.edibon.com
Summarized
Catalogue
two (2)
ELECTRONICS
2. Electronics
page
2.1. Basic Electronics. 5-12

2.2. Electronics Kits. 13-17
2.3. Transducers and Sensors. 18-23
2.4. Control Electronics. 24
2.5. Digital Electronics. 25
2.6. Industrial Electronics. 26-28
www.edibon.com
Page 4
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.- Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2 Modules 1 Power Supply 2 Modules

(power supply needed) FA-CO (power supply needed)
(M1) (M9)
(M2) (M10)
or
EBC-100
(M16) (M11)
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System

Used
Teaching
(M17) Technique (M12)
INS/SOF. Instructor Software

+
(M3) (M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(M4) 4 LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (M14)

(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M5) (M15)
(M31)
(M6)
5 EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/

Virtual Instrumentation System
Used (M60)
(M7) Teaching
Technique
DAIB. Data acquisition interface box
(M8) (M65)
DAB. Data acquisition board
EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and

Virtual Instrumentation
Other modules Software Expansion Board (M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules

Basic Electricity: " M14. Optoelectronics. Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits. " M15. Development Module. " M99. Expansion Board.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers: Some electronic sub-boards available:
" M16. Electric Networks. " M41. Resistance Transducers. "M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
" M17. Electromagnetism. " M43. Applications of Temperature. "M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
Basic Electronics: " M44. Applications of Light. "M99-3. Function Generator.
" M3. Semiconductors I. " M45. Linear Position and Force. "M99-4. AM Modulator.
" M4. Semiconductors II. " M46. Environmental Measurements. "M99-5. AM Demodulator.
" M5. Power Supplies. " M47. Rotational Speed & Position
" M6. Oscillators. Control. * We can develop any electronic sub-board
" M7. Operational Amplifiers. " M48. Sounds Measurements. according to the application required by
" M8. Filters. " M49. Applications of Temperature and the customer.
" M9. Power Electronics. Pressure.
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters. Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals. " M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits. " M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits. " M65. Control and Regulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)

2.- Electronics
1 Power Supply
Electronics
There are two choices for suppling the modules:

FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
2 Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Measurement managing and checking 10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit. 18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
instruments: 11.-Theoretical / practical exercises. Bridge circuit.
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation. Resistors association and the Wheatstone 19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Use of multimeter. Bridge: Kirchoff's laws:
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit. 12.-Voltage and current measurement 20.- Kirchoff's first law.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit. in a circuit with resistors connected 21.- Kirchoff's second law.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises. in series. 22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
Ohm's Law: 13.-Series/Parallel configuration study. 23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
5.-Ohm's Law verification. 14.-The Wheatstone Bridge. Additional Possibilities:
6.-Power calculation. 15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors Voltage/Current dividers.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises. circuit. Batteries and Switches.
Resistors: characteristics and types: 16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors Power source in series and parallel.
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code. circuit. The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
Ohmmeter. 17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit. Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits

PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Alternating signal characteristics. with the frequency. RLC Circuits:
Instruments: 14.-Study of faults in capacitors. 30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
1.- Waveforms study in A.C. 15.-Reactive capacitance variations with 31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the the capacitance. and High- Pass filters.
Wave form circuit. 16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel. 32.- Exercises.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform 17.-A.C. capacitors in series. Resonance:
circuit. 18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers. 33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
4.- Relation between peak values and 19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit. impedance source.
RMS for sinusoidal waves. 20.-Inductive reactance variations with 34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal the inductance. 35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
alternating current. 21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit. Circuit.
6.-Measurements using the 22.-Exercises. 36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
oscilloscope. Basic theorems and capacitance and impedance source.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles inductance circuits: 37.- Circuit frequency response and
for resistors in sinusoidal 23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in bandwidth.
alternating current. series. 38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series. 24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in 39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel. parallel. circuit.
10.- Exercises. 25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in 40.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors: series. The transformer:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform 26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3. 41.- The transformer.
and sinusoidal input current. 27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3. 42.- The transformer with load.
12.- Inductance with square waveform 28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in 43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
and a sinusoidal input voltage. parallel. 44.- Exercises.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations 29.-Exercises.
M16. Electric Networks PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

Ohm’s law: 9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly. Star-triangle transformation:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance 10.-DC+AC assembly. 17.- Resistance measurement between
of a continuous source. 11.-Theoretical/practical exercises. terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance. Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems: 18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an 12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent Wheatstone bridge:
alternating source. circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws. 19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises. fed by a DC source.
Electrical power: 13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to Superposition theorem: 20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
load. 14.-Application of the Superposition circuit.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC theorem. 21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
source. 15.-Error study in the Superposition by an AC source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises. circuit. Component values 22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination: modifications. Additional Possibilities:
8.-DC+DC assembly. 16.-Theoretical/practical exercises. Millman’s Theorem.
M17. Electromagnetism PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

1.-Magnetic fields measurement. 8.- Basic operation of the solenoid. continuous current motor.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil 9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit. 15.- Motor used as DC generator.
Reactance calculation. 10.-Basic operation of a relay. 16.- Cemf.
3.-Exercises. 11.-Self-holding of the position of the 17.- Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications: contacts. Stepping Motor:
4.-Mutual Inductance. 12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit. 18.- Stepper motor working.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer 13.-Exercises. 19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
6.-Core effect in a transformer response. Direct current motor: 20.- Exercises.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer. 14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a

Page 6
Basic Electronics
2.1-Basic
2.1- Electronics (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
Characteristics of the PN junction: The Zener diode: 15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
1.- Study of the diode. 9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode. 16.- Exercises.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes. 10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit. Common emitter amplifier:
3.- Exercises. 11.- Exercises. 17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
The diode as a rectifier element: Study and characteristics of the transistor: amplifier.
4.- Half wave rectifier. 12.- Study of the transistor. 18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit. 13.- Study of the fault in the transistor. 19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
6.- Bridge rectifier. 14.- Exercises. amplifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier. Transistor characteristics operating as a 20.- Exercises.
8.- Exercises. switch:
M4. Semiconductors II
Complementary transistors pair: 7.- Exercises. Analog switch:
1.- Complementary transistors pair. Differential amplifier: 14.- Analog switch.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal. 8.- Differential amplifier. 15.- Exercises.
3.- Fault study of the complementary 9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier. Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
Transistor pair. 10.- Exercises. 16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
4.- Exercises. Study and characteristics of the JFET 17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
Darlington configuration: transistor: directly.
5.- Darlington configuration. 11.- JFET characteristics. 18.- Exercises.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington 12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
configuration. 13.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies

Rectification: 8.- Protection against overvoltages. 16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
1.- Rectification. 9.- Study of the fault “Protection against 17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
2.- Bridge rectifier. overcurrents”. 18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 10.- Theoretical/practical exercises. Introduction to switched power supplies:
Fixed voltage sources: Symmetrical voltage power sources: 19.- Switching technique.
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode. 11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator. 20.- Switching technique. PWM.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and 12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator. 21.- Switching technique. Boost.
Transistor. 13.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through Voltage regulators with integrated circuits: Additional Possibilities:
Zener and Transistor”. 14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317. Voltage Feedback.
7.- Protection against overcurrents. 15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317. DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets: 6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator. Astable multivibrator:
1.- RC net oscillator. 7.- Exercises. 12.- Astable multivibrator.
2.- LC net oscillator. Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator: 13.- Fault study with an Astable
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net 8.- Colpitts oscillator. mulltivibrator.
oscillators. 9.- Hartley oscillator. 14.- Exercises.
4.- Exercises. 555 TIMER:
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts 15.- 555 timer.
Wien bridge oscillator: Oscillator. 16.- 555 timer fault study.
5.- Wien Bridge. 11.- Exercises. 17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers

Operational amplifier characteristics: 8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier. 16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
1.- Operational amplifier study. 9.- Voltage follower. 17.- Exercises.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation 10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
voltage. Amplifier. 18.- Comparator study.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study. 11.- Exercises. 19.- Comparators fault study.
4.- Exercises. The adder amplifier: 20.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier: 12.- Adding amplifier study. Additional Possibilities:
5.- Inverting amplifier study. 13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier. Attenuator.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study. 14.- Exercises. Voltage Divider.
7.- Exercises. The differential amplifier: Open-loop operation.
The non-inverting amplifier: 15.- Differential amplifier study.
M8. Filters
RC and LC filter responses: 10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T. 18.- Study of Faults in filters.
1.- Frequency response. 11.- Exercises theoretical/practical. 19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
2.- Low-pass filter. Active filters: Association of filters:
3.- High-pass filter. 12.- Low-pass filter. 20.- Behaviour of the filter.
4.- LC Circuit. 13.- Low-pass filter with load and 21.- Filter of distorted signal.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter. operational amplifier. 22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
14.- High-pass filter. high pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter. 23.- Filter in parallel.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical. 15.- High-pass filter with load and 24.- Study of Error in filters.
T-shaped Filter: operational amplifier. 25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
8.- Filter with double T link. 16.- The attenuation is cumulative. Additional Possibilities:
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1. 17.- Use of Operational Amplifier. Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
M9. Power Electronics

The bipolar power transistor: The thyristor: 11.- Study of insulation circuits.
1.-Study of the power transistor. 7.- Study of the thyristor. 12.- Exercises.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor. 8.- Study of the error of the thyristor. The TRIAC:
3.-Exercises. 9.- Exercises. 13.- Study of the TRIAC.
The MOSFET transistor: The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the 14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor. thyristor: 15.- Exercises.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET. 10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the Additional Possibilities:
6.-Exercises. thyristor. Half/Full wave control.

2.- Electronics
Basic Electronics (continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters

Analog switching. The bistable, astable 9.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
and monostable family: Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7- 18.- Triangular wave generation.
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch segments Displays: 19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
chip. 10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN A/D and D/A conversion:
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment 20.- D/A Converter.
Multiplexer. Display. 21.- A/D Converter.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog 11.- Error Study in the binary counter. 22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Multiplexer. 12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D Applications:
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment 23.- Random number generator.
Integrated circuit. Display. 24.- Measuring the time between two
5.-Error Study in the bistable. 13.- Error Study in the BCD counter. events.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated 14.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
astable circuit. Comparators and analog integrators:
7.-Error Study in the astable. 15.- Characteristics of an analog Additional Possibilities:
8.-Characteristics of an integrated comparator. Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
Monostable circuit. 16.- Analog integrator.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals

Numbers systems: 10.- Fault study in TTL circuit. Others types of integrated gates:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of 11.- Fault study in Logic Gates. 20.- Study of simple operations with a
sources. 12.- Exercises. Schmitt Trigger inverter.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit. CMOS gates: 21.- Operation study of a three-state
3.- Exercises. 13.- Basic function gates. buffer.
Logical circuits: 14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit. 22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
4.- Logical Diode. 15.- Exercises. 23.- Exercises.
5.- Fault study in Sources. Boolean Algebra and logical functions: Additional Possibilities:
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes. 16.- Study of use of Circuit #3. JK Flip-Flop.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit. 17.- Exercises. Control of Data Bus.
8.- Exercises. Open collector gates:
TTL gates: 18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
9.- Basic function gates. 19.- Exercises.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits

Encoders: 8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers. Arithmetic and logic operations:
1.- Study of an encoder. 9.- Exercises. 16.- Study of an adder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder. Demultiplexers: 17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
3.- Exercises. 10.- Study of a demultiplexer. and logic operations.
Decoders: 11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers. 18.- Study of a parity generator.
4.- Study of a decoder. 12.- Exercises. 19.- Study of the error in the Parity
5.- Fault study in the decoder. Digital Comparators: generator.
6.- Exercises. 13.- Study of a comparator. 20.- Exercises.
Multiplexers: 14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
7.- Study of a multiplexer. 15.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits

Bistables: 7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers. 13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
1.- Bistables. 8.- Exercises. Sequential circuits.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates. Counters: 14.- Exercises.
3.- Practical performance. 9.- Practice of the Counters. Memories:
4.- Study of error in the Bistables. 10.- Study of faults of the Counters. 15.- Exercises.
5.- Exercises. 11.- Exercises.
Shift registers: Synchronised sequential circuits:
6.- Shift registers. 12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
M14. Optoelectronics
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display Photo-conducting cells: 11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
(LCD): 6.- Light dependent resistors. 12.- Exercises.
1.- Light transmitters. 7.- Alarm. Infrared:
2.- Bar graph. 8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting 13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display. cell. 14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and 9.- Exercises. 15.- Exercises.
liquid crystal display. Fibre optics:
5.- Exercises. 10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module

MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement Logical source.
student’s own circuits, it consists on: Set of potentiometers.
Development board. Pulse generator and inverters.
Power supply connector. Interrupter.
Digital visual display unit. Clock.

Page 8
Basic Electronics
2.1-Basic
2.- Electronics
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer. 3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.

2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer. 4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature

The integrated circuit temperature Temperature Dependent Resistance used in an alarm circuit (double
transducer: (T.D.R) transducer. thermistor).
1.- Characteristics of an integrated The N.T.C (Negative Temperature The “K” type thermocouple temperature
temperature circuit. Coefficient) thermistor: thermistor:
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer. 4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C 6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer: thermistor. thermopar.
3.- Characteristics of a platinum 5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
M44. Applications of Light

1.- Photovoltaic Cell. 4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor. 7.- Photoconductive Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell. 5.- Photodiode PIN. 8.- Luminous intensity detector.
3.- Phototransistor. 6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
M45. Linear Position and Force
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable 2.- Characteristics of a Variable 3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Differential Transformer (LVDT). Resistance. Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements

1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor. 3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control

1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto 3.- Characteristics of an inductive 5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
transducer and its applications for transducer. Magnet tachogenerator.
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective 4.- Characteristics of a half effect
opto-transducer. transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements

1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic 2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic 3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
Microphone. Receiver.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure

The integrated circuit temperature Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
transducer: (T.D.R) transducer. thermistor:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated The N.T.C (Negative Temperature 6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
temperature circuit. Coefficient) thermistor: thermocouple.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l 4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
thermometer. 5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used 7.- Characteristic of a pressure
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer: in an alarm circuit (double transducer.
3.- Characteristics of a platinum thermistor).

2.- Electronics
Electronics
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
1.- Binary Slope Converter. 5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter. 5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation

1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional 6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block 9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
block. composition: Negative zero and
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator Negative Pole.
block. 7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole. means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order order system.
plant. 8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal means of Optimum Quantitative.
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis. 2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to - Some electronic sub-boards already
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the provide generic support to up to 8 developed:
M99 Board
electronic sub-boards, each one with its M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
own specific functionality, customized to M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
client necessities.
M99-3. Function Generator.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors M99-4. AM Modulator.
reserved for it on the M99 Board. M99-5. AM Demodulator.
There are connectors, in both the sub- * We can design and include any
boards and on the M99, through which one electronic circuit or application on a
can access the internal input/output data sub-board according to customer
points, to take measures and get requirements. This way, any
information about the practice. Thus, the Modules can be complemented with
student carries out the pedagogical aims. extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board The sub-boards can also be
there are 14 connectors for power supply. purchased independently to the
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be modules, thus giving total
supplied with different voltage intensities. freedom to customers in the
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC- acquisition of circuits.
100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
Page 10
Basic Electronics
2.1-Basic
2.- Electronics
Software
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Module
(electronic board)
+ Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
Instructor Student/Module These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
Software Software information on the subject of study.
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor

Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module

Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
Basic electricity -M8/SOF. Filters. -M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.). -M9/SOF. Power Electronics. -M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.). -M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters. -M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks. -M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals. -M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism. -M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits. -M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
Basic Electronic: -M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits. -M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I. -M14/SOF. Optoelectronics. Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II. -M15/SOF. Development Module. -M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies. Basic Electronic: Transducers: -M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators. -M41/SOF. Resistance transducers. -M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers. -M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
4 LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)

This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
click CAL will perform the calculations. be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different ...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
reference sources while in progress. For example: the tables. Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
names, conversion factors...

2.- Electronics
Data Acquisition
Electronics
5 EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
1 Cables to
interface and virtual
instrumentation
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
2
Connection software represented.
Data acquisition
points We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
3
board
4 Data acquisition Cable cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
interface box to
“n” computer Student connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
post
Module Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
(electronic board)
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:

5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board). DAIB
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:

PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
computer slot. This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version: only difference that for this one, the sampling
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to: rate to 250,000 S/s .
1,250,000 S/s. DAB
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:

It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope. -Function generator. -Transient recorder.
-Multimeter. -Spectrum analyzer. -Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.

Page 12
Electronics
2.2-Basic
2.1- Kits
Electronics
M-KITS. Basic Electronics and Electricity Assembly Kits:
2.- Electronics
1 Common and required
Elements for all Kits
FA-CO. Power Supply
2 Assembly Kits 2 Assembly Kits

(M-KIT1) (M-KIT6)

Used
Teaching
Technique
(M-KIT4)
INS/SOF. Instructor Software (M-KIT7)
+
M../SOF.
Student/Kit Software
4 CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software

(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M-KIT5)
(M-KIT16)

Used
Teaching
Technique

Other Kits Software Other Kits
The complete system includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module (M15) +
Kit/s, is the minimum supply).
Available Assembly Kits:

- M1-KIT Direct Current Circuits (D.C.). - M9-KIT Power Electronics.
- M2-KIT Alternating Current Circuits (A.C.). - M10-KIT Digital Systems and Converters.
- M3-KIT Semiconductors I. - M11-KIT Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
- M4-KIT Semiconductors II. - M12-KIT Basic Combinational Circuits.
- M5-KIT Power Supplies. - M13-KIT Basic Sequential Circuits.
- M6-KIT Oscillators. - M14-KIT Optoelectronics.
- M7-KIT Operational Amplifiers. - M16-KIT Electric Networks.
- M8-KIT Filters.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/electronickits/M-KITS.pdf
2.2- Electronics Kits (continuation)
M-KITS. Basic Electronics and Electricity Assembly Kits: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
1 Common and required Elements for all Assembly Kits

FA-CO. Power Supply
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any kit from M1-KIT to M16-KIT.

Components mounting baseplate.
This is a module for implementing the student’s own development, with:
Development board. Connector for power supply. Digital visualization LED. Logical source. Set of potentiometers. Pulse generator and
inverters.Interrupter. Clock.
Dimensions: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. approx. Weight: 300 gr. approx.
2 Assembly Kits
KITS, containing each one:
Assembly and practice manuals (8 manuals supplied). Set of components and wires necessary for mounting the corresponding practice. After the first assembly, all the
elements are recoverable.
M1-KIT. Direct Current (D.C.)Circuits
Measurement managing and checking instruments: 6.- Resistor measurements. Color code. Ohmmeter. 13.- Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors circuit.
1.- Electronic instrumentation operation. Use of 7.- Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit . 14.- Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone Bridge circuit.
multimeter. 8.- Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit. 15.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone Bridge circuit .
2.- Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit. Resistors association and the Wheatstone Bridge: Kirchoff's laws:
3.- Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit. 9.- Voltage and current measurement in a circuit 16.- Kirchoff's first law.
Ohm's Law: with resistors connected in series. 17.- Kirchoff's second law.
4.- Ohm's Law verification. 10.- Series/Parallel configuration study. 18.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
5.- Power calculation. 11.- The Wheatstone Bridge.
Resistors: characteristics and types: 12.- Study of Fault in Series Resistors circuit.
M2-KIT. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits

Alternating signal characteristics. Instruments: 13.- Study of faults in capacitors. 28.- Filters inductive resistance. Low-Pass and High-
1.- Waveforms study in A.C. 14.- Reactive capacitance variations with capacitance. Pass filters.
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the Wave form circuit. 15.- A.C. capacitors in parallel. Resonance:
3.- Study of Faults in the Wave form circuit. 16.- A.C. capacitors in series. 29.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low Impedance
4.- Relation between peak values and RMS for 17.- A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers. source.
sinusoidal waves. 18.- Inductance in an A.C circuit. 30.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance circuit.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal alternating current. 19.- Inductive reactance variations with the inductance. 31.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance circuit.
6.- Measurements using the oscilloscope. 20.- Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit. 32.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high impedance
7.- Voltage and current phase angles for resistors in Basic theorems and capacitance and inductance source.
sinusoidal alternating current. 33.- Circuit frequency response and bandwidth.
circuits:
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series. 34.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
21.- A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in series.
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel. 35.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance circuit.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors: 22.- A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in parallel.
23.- A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in series. The transformer:
10.- Capacitance with square waveform and a 36.- The transformer.
sinusoidal input current. 24.- Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.
25.- Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3. 37.- The transformer with load.
11.- Inductance with square waveform and a
26.- A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in parallel. 38.- Current measurement in the secondary transformer
sinusoidal input voltage.
RLC Circuits: with charge.
12.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations with the
frequency. 27.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
M3-KIT. Semiconductors I
Characteristics of the PN junction: 6.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier. Transistor characteristics operating as a switch:
1.- Study of the diode. The Zener diode: 11.-Study of the transistor as a switch.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes. 7.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode. Common emitter amplifier:
The diode as a rectifier element: 8.- Study of faults in Zener circuit. 12.-Study of the common emitter NPN amplifier.
3.- Half wave rectifier. Study and characteristics of the transistor: 13.-Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
4.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit. 9.- Study of the transistor. 14.-Study of the common emitter PNP amplifier.
5.- Bridge rectifier. 10.- Study of the fault in the transistor.
M4-KIT. Semiconductors II
Complementary transistors pair: Differential amplifier: Analog switch:
1.- Complementary transistors pair. 6.- Differential amplifier. 10.- Analog switch.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal. 7.- Fault study in the differential amplifier. Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
3.- Fault study of the complementary Transistor pair. 11.- Amplifier coupled directly.
Darlington configuration: Study and characteristics of the JFET transistor: 12.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled directly.
4.- Darlington configuration. 8.- JFET characteristics.
5.- Fault study of the Darlington configuration. 9.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.

Page 14
Electronics
2.2-Basic
2.1- Kits (continuation)
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2 Assembly Kits (continuation)
M5-KIT. Power Supplies
Rectification: 7.- Protection against overvoltages. 13.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
1.- Rectification. 8.- Study of the fault “Protection against 14.- Fault Study in adjustable L200 Regulator.
2.- Bridge rectifier. overcurrents”. Introduction to switched power supplies:
Fixed voltage sources: Symmetrical voltage power sources: 15.- Switching technique.
3.- Power supply with the Zener diode. 9.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator. 16.- Switching technique. PWM.
4.- Stabilization through Zener and Transistor. 10.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator. 17.- Switching technique. Boost.
5.- Fault study in “Stabilization through Zener and Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:
Transistor”. 11.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.
6.- Protection against overcurrents. 12.- Study of the fault in adjustable LM317 regulator.
M6-KIT. Oscillators PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

Oscillators. RC and LC Nets: Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator: 555 TIMER:
1.- RC net oscillator. 6.- Colpitts oscillator. 11.-555 timer.
2.- LC net oscillator. 7.- Hartley oscillator. 12.-555 timer fault study.
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net oscillators. 8.- Faults study with the Colpitts oscillator.
Wien bridge oscillator: Astable multivibrator:
4.- Wien Bridge. 9.- Astable multivibrator.
5.- Fault study in the Wien bridge oscillator. 10.- Fault study with an Astable mulltivibrator.
M7-KIT. Operational Amplifiers

Operational amplifier characteristics: The non-inverting amplifier: The differential amplifier:
1.- Operational amplifier study. 6.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier. 11.- Differential amplifier study.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation voltage. 7.- Voltage follower. 12.- Differential amplifier fault study.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study. 8.- Fault study in the non-inverting amplifier. Comparators:
The inverting amplifier: The adder amplifier: 13.- Comparator study.
4.- Inverting amplifier study. 9.- Adding amplifier study. 14.- Comparators fault study.
5.- Inverting amplifier fault study. 10.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.
M8-KIT. Filters
RC and LC filter responses: 9.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T. 16.- Study of Faults in filters.
1.- Frequency response. Active filters: Association of filters:
2.- Low-pass filter. 10.- Low-pass filter. 17.- Behaviour of the filter.
3.- High-pass filter. 11.- Low-pass filter with load and operational 18.- Filter of distorted signal.
4.- LC Circuit. amplifier. 19.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and high pass
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter. 12.- High-pass filter. filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter. 13.- High-pass filter with load and operational 20.- Filter in parallel.
T-shaped Filter: amplifier. 21.- Study of Error in filters.
7.- Filter with double T link. 14.- The attenuation is cumulative.
8.- Generator circuit of the signal S1. 15.- Use of Operational Amplifier.
M9-KIT. Power Electronics

The bipolar power transistor: The thyristor: The TRIAC:
1.- Study of the power transistor. 5.- Study of the thyristor. 9.- Study of the TRIAC.
2.- Study of faults in the power transistor. 6.- Study of the error of the thyristor. 10.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
The MOSFET transistor: The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the thyristor:
3.- Study of the MOSFET transistor. 7.- Study of the trigger circuits of the thyristor.
4.- Study of faults in the MOSFET transistor. 8.- Study of insulation circuits.
M10-KIT. Digital Systems and Converters

Analog switching. The bistable, astable and 8.- Characteristics of an integrated Monostable 13.- Characteristics of an analog comparator.
monostable family: circuit. 14.- Analog integrator.
1.- Characteristics of an analog switch chip. Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7-segments 15.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
2.- Study of the error F1 in the Analog Multiplexer. Displays: 16.- Triangular wave generation.
9.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN Counter A/D and D/A conversion:
3.- Study of the errors in the Analog Multiplexer.
74LS193 and 7-Segment Display. 17.- D/A Converter.
4.- Characteristics of an S-R type Latch Integrated 10.- Error Study in the binary counter.
circuit. 18.- A/D Converter.
11.- Characteristics of the BCD UP/DOWN counter Applications:
5.- Error Study in the bistable. and 7-Segment Display. 19.- Random number generator.
6.- Characteristics of an integrated astable circuit. 12.- Error Study in the BCD counter. 20.- Measuring the time between two events.
7.- Error Study in the astable. Comparators and analog integrators:
M11-KIT. Digital Electronics Fundamentals

Numbers systems: 7.- Basic function gates. 13.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of SOURCES. 8.- Study of the faults in TTL circuit. Others types of integrated gates:
2.- Fault study in the circuit. 9.- Study of the faults in Logic Gates. 14.- Study of simple operations with a Schmitt
Logical circuits: CMOS gates: Trigger inverter.
3.- Logical Diode. 10.- Basic function gates. 15.- Operation study of a three-state buffer.
4.- Fault study in sources. 11.- Study of the faults in CMOS circuit. 16.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
5.- Logic with transistor and diodes. Boolean Algebra and logical functions:
6.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit. 12.- Study of use of Circuit #3.
TTL gates: Open collector gates:
2.2- Electronics Kits (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Assembly Kits (continuation)

M12-KIT. Basic Combinational Circuits
Encoders: 6.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers. 11.- Study of an adder.
1.- Study of an encoder. Demultiplexers: 12.- Study of the error in the arithmetic and logic
2.- Fault study in the encoder. 7.- Study of a demultiplexer. operations.
Decoders: 8.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers. 13.- Study of a parity generator.
3.- Study of a decoder. Digital Comparators: 14.- Study of the error in the Parity generator.
4.- Fault study in the decoder. 9.- Study of a comparator.
Multiplexers: 10.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
5.- Study of a multiplexer. Arithmetic and logic operations:
M13-KIT. Basic Sequential Circuits

Bistables: 5.- Shift registers. 9.- Practice of the Synchronised.
1.- Bistables. 6.- Study of faults of the Shift registers. 10.- Study of errors of the Synchronised sequential
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates. Counters: circuits.
3.- Practical performance. 7.- Practice of the Counters. Memories:
4.- Study of error in the Bistables. 8.- Study of faults of the Counters. 11.- Exercises
Shift registers: Synchronised sequential circuits:
M14-KIT. Optoelectronics
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display (LCD): Photo-conducting cells: 9.- Fault study using fibre optics.
1.- Light transmitters. 5.- Light dependent resistors. Infrared:
2.- Bar graph. 6.- Alarm. 10.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display. 7.- Fault study on the photo-conducting cell. 11.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and liquid crystal Fibre optics:
display. 8.- Fibre optics practice.
M16-KIT. Electric Networks PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

Ohm’s law: 6.- DC+DC assembly. Star-triangle transformation:
1.- Calculation of the internal resistance of a 7.- Error study in the circuit, DC assembly. 12.- Resistance measurement between terminals.
continuous source. 8.- DC+AC assembly. Delta| Y configurations.
2.- Error study in an internal resistance. Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems: Wheatstone bridge:
3.- Internal resistance calculation of an alternating 9.- Thévenin and Norton equivalent circuits. 13.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge fed by a
source. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws. DC source.
Electrical power: Superposition theorem: 14.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge circuit.
4.- Power transferred by a DC source to load. 10.- Application of the Superposition theorem. 15.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed by an AC
5.- Power transferred to a load by an AC source. 11.- Error study in the Superposition circuit. source.
Power supplies combination: Component values modifications.
Software
With no physical connection between the kit and the computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the Student/Kit
Kit + Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher knows at any moment
what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students. These, on the other
Instructor Student/Module hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the information on the
Software Software subject of study.

- Print reports.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the kits, and working in network configuration,
allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Kit Software).
It explains how to use the kit, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each Kit has its own Student Software package.
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, showing how to
complete the exercises and practices.
Available Student Software Packages:
- M1/SOF Direct Current Circuits (D.C.). - M6/SOF Oscillators. - M11/SOF Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
- M2/SOF Alternating Current Circuits (A.C.). - M7/SOF Operational Amplifiers. - M12/SOF Basic Combinational Circuits.
- M3/SOF Semiconductors l - M8/SOF Filters. - M13/SOF Basic Sequential Circuits.
- M4/SOF Semiconductors II. - M9/SOF Power Electronics. - M14/SOF Optoelectronics.
- M5/SOF Power Supplies. - M10/SOF Digital Systems and Converters. - M16/SOF Electric Networks.

Page 16
Electronics
2.2-Basic
2.1- Kits (continuation)
Electronics
2.- Electronics
Software (continuation)
4 CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules and with M1-KIT to M16-KIT Assembly Kits. These modules/Kits cover every subject in Basic
Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital. CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained
during the experimental practices. With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against

any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
Data Acquisition
Data acquisition
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic Modules or Kits and the PC. With the
1 Cables to
interface and virtual
instrumentation
EDAS/VIS system, information from the module/kit is sent to the computer. There, it can be
2
Connection software analyzed and represented.
Data acquisition
points We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the Modules/Kits with the
3
board
4 Data acquisition Cable supplied cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the
interface box to
“n” computer Student DAIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
post
Module Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module/Kit), the student can
(electronic board)
get the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer. DAIB
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
computer slot. This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
1,250,000 S/s. DAB
Analog outputs: 2.

It works as:

2.3- Transducers and Sensors
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
2.- Electronics
Electronics
2 Test Modules 1 Base Units: 2 Test Modules

(to be used with Base Units) (common for all test modules type “BS”) (to be used with Base Units)
BS1 BS6
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA.
EDIBON Computer Control System
Base
Unit
Computer
(not included
BS2 Data Acquisition Software for: in the supply)
Board - Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
BS7
OR
BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
BS3
BS8
BS4
BS9
BS5
Other modules
“BS” System includes a set of electronic components with a twofold purpose: to control the signal produced by the transducers, and to evaluate and quantify it.
Sensors or transducers are common elements in the state of our technology. Therefore this SYSTEM has been developed to show the basic principles of different types
of sensors and their way of processing signals.
This system consists of:
1 Base Unit, to control the system:
Option 1: BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit, including EDIBON Computer Control System. OR
Option 2: BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
2 Test Modules:
BS1. Vibration and/or Deformation Test BS4. Flow Test Module. BS8. Proximity Test Module.
Module. BS5. Ovens Test Module. BS9. Pneumatic Test Module.
BS2. Temperature Test Module. BS6. Liquid Level Test Module.
BS3. Pressure Test Module. BS7. Tachometers Test Module.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.

Page 18
2.1- Transducers
2.3-Basic and Sensors
Electronics (continuation)
2.- Electronics
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors: (continuation)
1 Base Units
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System:
Control Interface integrated in the unit box (BSPC). Data acquisition board to be installed in a computer slot.
Computer Control Software.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
BSUB. Base Unit
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
2 Test Modules
BS1.Vibration and/or Deformation Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This Test Module has been designed to teach mechanical vibration and 1.- To measure the vibration of a vibrant girder using
displacement variable measurement techniques. extensiometric gauges.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are 2.- To use a heating resistance to rise the girder temperature
represented graphically. in order to study the effect on the sensors.(Thermocouple
Extensiometric gauges: and heating resistance).
Characteristics: Resistance at 24ºC: 120 W. Gauge factor at 24ºC: 3.- To detect the displacement of the BS1 system vibrant
2.120. girder using a LVDT sensor.
Heating resistance and thermocouple: 4.- Effect of temperature variation on an extensiometric
Resistance to produce temperature variations in the vibrant bar. beam.
Thermocouple type “K”. Temperature range:-50ºC to 350ºC. 5.- Effect of deformation on the resistance of a beam.
LVDT Sensor: Input Voltage range: 10 to 24VDC. 6.- Measure of the three deformation dimensions or
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power deformation of spherical or cylindrical systems.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the 7.- Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) for
Test Module. measuring displacements.
8.- Analysis of how to compensate the variation of resistance
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
of a gauge due to temperature variations, using shorted
Each module may operate independently of another. circuits with compensating gauges.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x350 mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 9.- Linear variable differential transformers (LVDT) as a
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/ weighing system.
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf 10.- Effect on the vibration of a beam with different masses.
BS2.Temperature Test Module

The Temperature Test Module has been designed to teach the use and
applications of sensors of temperature as a measure, and its control. 1.- How to use the Curie effect as application of a high
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are temperature thermostatic controller.
represented graphically. 2.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. To use the bimetallic
Bimetallic switch sensor: Opening temperature: 50ºC. Closing thermostat as a temperature control, calculating its
Temp.: 30ºC. hysteresis.
Adjustable bimetallic thermostat, with heater resistor: 3.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. How we can reduce the
Temperature range: 0ºC to 30ºC. hysteresis by adding a resistor to the heating circuit.
Relay AC: Voltage and current (nominal) :250V-10A. 3 sockets. 4.- To use the thermostat based on a bimetallic sensor to
Switching voltage: 12 V.
control the temperature.
Capillary thermostat: Temperature range: 0ºC-90ºC.
Thermocouples: 3 Cromel-Alumel thermocouples type K. 5.- Capillary thermostatic controller.
Temperature range: - 50ºC to 250ºC.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
Each module may operate independently of another.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available. Page 19 www.edibon.com

2.3- Transducers and Sensors (continuation)
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:

2.- Electronics
(continuation)
Electronics
2 Test Modules (continuation)

BS3.Pressure Test Module
The Pressure Test Module has been designed to teach the use and 1.- Use of linear positioning sensor (potentiometer) to detect
applications of this kind of sensors measurement systems. It shows the the displacement produced by a diaphragm expansion
different pressure measurement techniques. caused by the air pressure.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are 2.- Use of a LVDT as an element to measure the diaphragm
represented graphically.
distortion that is consequence of the pressure inside the
Linear positioning sensor (Potentiometer).
pressure chamber.
Resistor range: 500 W to 5 KW. Operation force: 200-750g.
LVDT sensor: Sensibility: 780mV/mm. Power voltage: 10 to 24Vdc. 3.- Differential pressure sensor with hole-board system. Use
Differential pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi. of a differential pressure sensor of the semiconductor
Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi. Overpressure: 60 psi. type to measure the pressure fall in a hole-board system.
Extensiometric gauges: Nominal resistor @ 25ºC: 120 W. Gauge 4.- Extensiometric Gauges. To detect objects using an
factor: 2.00 to 2.1 typical. infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
Manometric pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 a 30 psi. 5.- Measure the pressure in the chamber, using two different
Overpressure: 60 psi.
types of sensors (manometric and absolute pressure
Absolute pressure sensor: Measurement range: 2 to 30 psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi. sensor).
Air Compressor: Air flow: 10 l /min. Pressure: 1.83Kg/cm2. Power 6.- Extensiometric gauges for measuring deformations: their
supply: 220V, 50/60Hz. resistance changes as the diaphragm expands due to the
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power pressure coming from the pressure container.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the Test
Module.
BS4.Flow Test Module

The objective this module is to show techniques to measure 1.- To measure the water volume produced by an
changeable fluids. underwater pump in the module using an optical flow
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically. sensor.
Flow optical sensor: 2.- To use a high-resolution optical flow sensor to measure
Power supply: 4.5 to 24 Vdc. Standard flow range: 0.5 to 5 GPM. low volumes.
High resolution optical flow sensor: Measurement range: 0.25 to 6.5 3.- Level sensor by pressure. To use a differential pressure
l/min. sensor to measure the liquid level in one of the tanks.
Underwater pump. 4.- Differential pressure sensor. To measure the pressure-fall
Level sensor by pressure: It is a differential pressure sensor. Pressure in the module hole board system, as a necessary
range: 0 to 1psi. Overpressure: 20psi.
parameter to determine volume.
Differential pressure sensor (Hole board system): Measurement
range: 0 to 30 psi. Overpressure: 60 psi. 5.- To measure the flow volume generated by the underwater
Changeable flow meter: Range:0 -2 l/min. pump using a flow meter of changeable area.
V narrowing. 6.- To obtain the flow-volume value in the secondary tank
Main and secondary tanks. using the V narrowing weir.
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
BS5.Ovens Test Module

With “BS5” Test Module it is possible to study temperature 1.- Heating resistance. Raise the oven internal temperature
measurement techniques using several kinds of sensors placed over the environmental temperature using a heating
inside the sealed place that is used as oven. resistance to make tests and practices related with
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are temperature measurement.
represented graphically.
Oven chamber. 2.- To use a fan as refrigerating element of the oven.
Heating resistance: Maximum dissipation power of 500W. 3.- To use thermocouples as temperature sensors elements
Fan: Maximum power: 0.96 W. Maximum air flow: 2.5 l/s. inside the oven. Temperature measurement using a
Thermocouples: thermocouple.
4 thermocouples placed inside the oven, each one of them at a 4.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a platinum
different height. Temperature range: -184 ºC to 400 ºC. resistance thermometer.
Platinum resistance thermometer: 5.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a
Temperature range: -70ºC to 600ºC. thermistor temperature sensor.
Thermistor: 6.- Temperature measurement using a thermistor, based on
NTC thermistor. Resistence at 25ºC: 5.8 KW. Temperature its negative temperature coefficient.
range: -40ºC to 125ºC.
7.- To obtain the temperature value inside the oven, using a
Semiconductor temperature sensor: Reverse polarized diode.
semiconductor sensor (diode).
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel 8.- PID control.
of the Test Module.
Non computer controlled version available.

Page 20
2.1- Transducers
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Test Modules (continuation)
BS6.Liquid Level Test Module
The Liquid Level Test Module “BS6” has been designed to teach the
use and applications of level sensors and their measurement systems. 1.- To use a capacitative sensor to measure the liquid level in
This module teaches techniques to measure and control the liquid the tank.
level in a tank.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are 2.- To use the differential pressure sensor as an element to
represented graphically. determine the water level in a tank.
Water tanks. 2 Minipumps: Power supply: 12Vdc (max. voltage). 3.- To use a changeable resistance fixed to a float system as a
Nominal current: 1 A DC. liquid level measurement element.
Capacitative level sensor. Pressure level sensor, pressure range: 0-
4.- Conduction Sensor. Use of a sensor made up of to steel
1psi. Level gauge changeable resistance with path end and beginning
switches. Conduction sensor. Magnetic float level sensor. Optical level electrodes to measure the water level of a tank.
sensor. 5.- Magnetic float level sensor. Detect a precise tank liquid
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power level with a magnetic switch sensor.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the 6.- Control the BS6 system left tank liquid level using an
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals. optical level sensor.
BS7.Tachometers Test Module

This module has been designed to teach linear and angular speed 1.- DC Motor. Provide the group of sensors of the BS7 system
measurement techniques.
fixed to the central axle of the equipment with movement
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically. power.
Inductive Sensor: output voltage: 2.- DC Tachometer. To use a DC motor as a tachometer to
DC Motor: nominal voltage: 12V., resistance: 9,7 Oh., max. vacuum measure the revolutions of the BS7 system central axle.
speed: 8500 r.p.m., max. load speed: approx. 3500 r.p.m., start 3.- Inductive Sensor.
voltage: 210mV. DC Tachometer. 4.- Refractive Infrared Sensor. To measure the central axle
Refractive Infrared Sensor. Hall Effect position sensor. revolutions of the BS7 system using a light reflection
Slot Sensor: Slotted optical switch where an input LED and an output optical sensor.
phototransistor are capsulated.
Encoder. 5.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a slotted
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power optical sensor through light interruption.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the 6.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a Hall-effect
Test Module. position sensor.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals. 7.- To measure the central axle revolutions of the BS7 system
Each module may operate independently of another. using the encoder.
BS8.Proximity Test Module

This Module has been designed to teach techniques to detect the 1.- How to use a capacitative sensor to detect metal objects
proximity of objects, focusing on the distance at which each sensor is
able to detect the object and the type of material it can detect. as the pass in front of the sensor.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are 2.- To use a Hall effect sensor as an element to detect the
represented graphically. presence of magnetic objects.
DC Motor: Nominal power supply: 12Vdc. 3.- Reflection infrared sensor. To use an optical sensor that
Proximity capacitative sensor, detection distance: 10 mm.
works through infrared light reflection.
Hall effect sensor.
Infrared sensor by reflection: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter. 4.- Infrared sensor by transmission. To detect objects using
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector. an infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
Transmission infrared sensor: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter. 5.- Conduction sensor. To detect magnetic objects using a
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector. REED switch sensor.
Conduction sensor. Inductive sensor: detection distance: 2mm.
Ultrasound sensor: transmitter sensibility: 106 dB., receiver sensibility: 6.- To detect the presence of ferrous object using an inductive
65 dB., resonance frequency: 40kHz. sensor.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power 7.- Ultrasound sensor. To detect metallic and non-metallic
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the object using high frequency sounds.
Test Module. Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
BS9.Pneumatic Test Module

The Pneumatics Test Module “BS9” has been designed to teach 1.- Proportional valves. To control electronically the vertical
techniques of control and handling of a pneumatic piston.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are displacement of a double effect pneumatic piston using
represented graphically. proportional valves.
Proportional valve 1 and 2: Nominal voltage: 24Vdc, pressure range: 2.- Differential pressure sensor. To use a pressure sensor for
8 bar max., 0 to 6 bar control. Pneumatic switch: max. pressure: 6 measuring the pressure difference between both
bars. Regulation filter: manual drainage, max. input pressure: 8 bars.
Differential pressure sensor: measurement range: 0 to 30 psi. LVDT pneumatic piston air inlets.
Sensor. 3.- Pneumatic switch. To deflect the air flow in the BS9 system
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power using a pneumatic switch.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the 4.- LVDT Linear Displacement Sensor. To measure pneumatic
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals. piston displacement using an excitation and DC output
Each module may operate independently of another. LVDT.

2.3- Transducers and Sensors (continuation)
SAIT. Transducers and Instrumentation Trainer

2.- Electronics
Electronics
Optional:
EDAS/VIS.
EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Data Acquisition
Data and Virtual
Data Acquisition Interface Box Acquisition Instrumentation
Board Software
SAIT. Trainer

The SAIT trainer shows didactically the function principles 1.- Basic Control Systems description. Linear Position transducers.
of the transducers most used in industry. It is divided into
Characteristics of the Control System: 40.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable Differential
two parts: the lower part, in which all the input and output Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of an ON/OFF temperature
transducers are found, while in the upper part, the system
control System. 41.- Characteristics of a Variable Resistance.
of signal conditioning and those of instrumentation are
3.- Characteristics of an ON/ OFF Lighting System. 42.- Characteristics of a Strain gauge Transducer.
found; the electrical and pneumatic power supplies are
housed in its interior. 4.- Investigation of the Characteristics of a Positional Transducers for Environmental Measurement
Control System. Applications:
Input Transducers:
5. - Proportional Control. 43.- Characteristics of a air flow transducer.
Resistance Transducers for applications in angular or
linear position: 6.- Proportional+Integral Control. 44.- Characteristics of a pressure sensor.
Linearly sliding potentiometer. Rotary carbon-track 7. - Proportional+DerivateControl. 45.- Characteristics of a humidity sensor.
potentiometer. Rotary coil potentiometer. Precision 8. - Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control. Rotational Velocity Transducers or Position Measuring
servo- potentiometer. The Wheatstone Bridge circuit. 9. - Characteristics of a Speed Control System. Applications:
Applications of temperature: 10.- Operation in Open Loop. 46.- Characteristics of a slotted opto-transducers and its
11.- Operation in Closed Loop, Proportional Control. applications for counting and speed measurement.
NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient)
Thermistors. RTD Sensor (Platinum Transducer with 12.- Proportional+Integral Control. 47.- Characteristics of the reflective optotransducers
and Gray code disk.
Temperature dependent Resistance). Temperature 13.- Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.
sensor IC “Integrated Circuit LM 335”. Type “K” 48.- Characteristics of an inductive transducer.
Display devices:
Thermocouples. 49.- Characteristics of a Hall effect transducer.
14.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a meter of
Applications of light: time. 50.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent magnet
Photovoltaic Cell. Phototransistor. Photodiode PIN. Tachogenerator.
15.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a simple counter.
Photoconductive Cell. Transducers for Measuring Sound:
16.- Application of the Timer/Counter as rev-counter or
Linear position and force: frequency-meter. 51.- Characteristics of a Dynamic Microphone.
Linear Variable Differential Transformer LVDT. 17.- Characteristics of an L.E.D. bargraph display unit. 52.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic receiver.
Extensiometric Transducer. 18.- Characteristic of a Mobile Coil Meter. Transducers for Sound Output:
Environmental measurements: 19.- Comparison of Digital, Bargraph and Mobile Coil 53.- Characteristics of the mobile coil loudspeaker.
Air flow Sensor. Air pressure Sensor. Humidity sensor. meters. 54.- Characteristics of a Buzzer.
Rotational speed and position control: 20.- To widen the voltage index of the B. M. meter. Output Transducer for Linear or Angular Movement:
Slotted optoelectronic Sensor. Opto-reflective Variable Resistance transducers in angle or linear 55.- Characteristics of a D.C. Solenoid.
Sensor. Inductive sensor. Hall effect Sensor. arrangement: 56.- Characteristics of a D.C. Relay.
Permanent D.C. magnet tachogenerator. 21.- Variation of the Output Voltage for a 57.- Characteristics of a Solenoid air valve.
Sound measurements: Potentiometer used as a Position transducer. 58.- Characteristics of a Permanent Magnet Motor.
Dynamical microphone. Ultrasonic receiver. 22.- The Buffer as compensator for the effect of the load Signal Conditioning Circuits:
Visualization Devices: on the output voltage of a potentiometer. 59.- Characteristics of the Direct Current amplifiers 1,
Timing device/ counter with LED display. Graphic bar 23.- Servo potentiometer. Variation of the output 2 and x100.
visualizer. Mobile coil voltmeter. voltage with respect to its position. 60.- Characteristics of a current amplifier and
Output Transducers: 24.- Measuring the Resistance using a Wheatstone application of a buffer amplifier.
Electrical Resistance. Incandescent Lamp. Bridge Circuit. 61.- Characteristics of Power and Buffer Amplifiers.
Applications for the sound output: 25.- Measuring the Voltage using “Null Balance” 62.- Characteristics of an Inverter Amplifier.
Buzzing (Buzzer). Mobile coil loud speaker. Ultrasonic Procedures (Method1).
63.- Characteristics of a Differential Amplifier.
transmitter. 26.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages Signal Converter Circuits:
Applications of linear or angular motion:
smaller than the normal available voltage. 64.- Characteristics of a Voltage to Current Converter.
D.C. Soleinod. D.C. Relay. Solenoid Valve.
27.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance” 65.- Characteristics of a Current to Voltage Converter.
Permanent Magnet D.C. Motor.
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages 66.-Characteristics of a Voltage to Frequency
Signal Conditioners: greater than the normal voltage. Converter.
D.C. Amplifiers. A.C. Amplifier. Power Amplifier.
Transducers for Applications of Temperature 67.-Characteristics of a Frequency to Voltage
Current Amplifier. Buffers. Inverting Amplifier. Measurement: Converter.
Differential amplifier. V/F and F/V Converters. V/I
28.- Characteristics of an Integrated Temperature Circuit. 68.- Characteristics of a Full Wave Rectifier.
and I/V Converters. Full Wave Rectifier. Hysteresis
29.- Construction of a Digital Thermometer using the Comparators, Oscillator and Filters:
convertible Comparator. Electronic switch. Oscillator facilities of the TRANSDUCER TRAINER.
40 kHz. Filter 40 kHz. Time-constant convertible 69.- Characteristics of a Comparator.
30.- Characteristics of a Platinum Temperature 70.- Characteristics of an Alarm Oscillator circuit.
Low Pass Filter. Dependent Resistance (T.D.R.) Transducer.
Circuit with Mathematical Operation: Adding 71.- Characteristics of an Electronic Switch.
31.- T h e N . T. C . ( N e g a t i v e Te m p e r a t u r e
amplifier. Integrator with different time constants. coefficient)Thermistor. 72.- Characteristics of the Oscillator of 40 kHz.
Differentiator with different time constants. 32.- Characteristics of an N.T.C. Thermistor 73.- Characteristics of Filters.
Instrumentation Amplifier. Circuit SAMPLE & HOLD. (Resistance measuring method). Circuits that carry out Mathematical Operations:
Amplifiers with gain control and offset. 33.- Characteristics of the N.T.C. Thermistor used in an 74.- Characteristics of a Adding Amplifier.
Furthermore it contains a linearly mounted system of a alarm circuit (double thermistor). 75.- Characteristics of an Integrator.
D.C. motor, tachodynamo, reflective, slotted opto- 34.- Characteristics of a Type “K” Thermocouple. 76.- Characteristics of a Differentiator Circuit.
sensors to detect the absolute and incremental position. Transducers for Light Measuring Applications: 77.- Characteristics of a Sample and Hold Circuit.
Cables. 35.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
Manuals: 8 manuals supplied. 36.- Characteristics of a photo-transistor.
Dimensions (approx.): 400 x 400 x 300 mm. 37.- Luminous intensity detector.
Weight: 10 Kg.
38.-The P.I.N. Photodiode.
More information in: 39.- Characteristics of a P.I.N. Photodiode.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
electronics/transducerssensors/SAIT.pdf
Page 22
2.1- Transducers
SPC. Computer Controlled Weighing System
2.- Electronics
Arm for balance with
counterbalance Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
Upper view
Force Sensor 2 3 4
detail Control Data Software for:
Interface Box Acquisition - Computer Control
Device for Board - Data Acquisition
5 Cables and Accessories - Data Management
the tray
coupling 6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL

1 Unit: SPC. Weighing System

Items supplied as standard
1.- Sensor Calibration.
1 SPC Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2.- Hysteresis study.
Stainless steel arm for balance. Counterbalance of 0.5 and 1 Kg. Anodized aluminium tray. High precision force sensor of 0- 3.- Weight high precission measurement.
10N.
2 SPC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 SPC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 700x400x400 mm. Weight: 20 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/SPC.pdf
SCSP. Pressure Sensors Calibration System

Bench-top unit.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Diagram in the front panel.
Vacuum-meter of range (-9800 [ mmH2O] to 0).
Vacuum-meter of range (-1000 [ mmH2O] to 0).
Manometer of range (0 to 1000 [ mmH2O] ).
Manometer of range (0 to 2,5 [ bars]).
Mobile Piston (syringe).
8 valves.
Non-return valve.
Polyurethane tubes.
This system is supplied with atm, bares, psi, mmHg, mmH2O, conversion
tables.
This system allows the calibration of 6 sensors (same type) simultaneously.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =720 x 300 x 570 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electronics/transducerssensors/SCSP.pdf
2.4- Control Electronics
RYC. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation and Control
2.- Electronics
Electronics
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2 3
Data Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
1 Unit: RYC. Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation 5 Manuals
and Control, including Control Interface

1.-Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional Block.
1RYC Unit: 2.-Study in open loop Nº2: Integrative Block.
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
3.-Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
Steel box. 3 Modules of Controller of 1st Order. 3 Modules of Integrator. 2 Modules of Inverter Amplifier.
Module of Inverter Reductor. Module of Negative Zero. Module of Positive Zero. Module of Hysteresis. 4.-Study in open loop Nº4: Second order plants.
Module of Limiter. Module of Controller of 2nd Order. Module of Adding.14 Capacitors from 1mF to 100mF. 5.-Study in open loop Nº5: Non-line plants: Limitation
6 Diodes. 34 Operational Amplifiers. 33 Potentiometers.186 Resistances. 2 Transistors. On/Off switch. and Hysteresis.
Fuse. Connector to PC. Control Interface. 6.- Study in open loop Nº6: Blocks Composition:
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: Negative Zero and Negative Pole.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. 7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by means of
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. Quantitative Optimum 1st order system.
3 RYC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: 8.- Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by means of
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, Quantitative Optimum 2nd order system.
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on Other practical possibilities:
all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to
250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification Analog regulators procedure: (9-11):
of the conditions during the process. 9.-First order filter.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 10.-Integral regulator.
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 11.-Regulating I+P with phase advance in the feedback.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg. 12.-Potentiometer adjustment.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/RYC.pdf
CADDA. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) Converters
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2 3
Data Software for:
- Data Management
4 Cables and Accessories
1 Unit: CADDA. Teaching Unit for the Study of A/D and D/A 5 Manuals
Converters, including Control Interface.

1CADDA Unit:
1.- Sampling theorem.
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Steel box. 2.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Monopolar
In this unit, the elements are separated in two parts: lefthand part for analog to digital conversions, and assembly.
right hand part for digital to analog conversions. 3.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
Analog/Digital converter board. Digital/Analog converter board. 4.- Monopolar binary ramp converter.
5.- Quantification effects.
Signal generator board, with 100 to 330 mF capacitors, 10 to 50K potentiometers and 1 to 100K 6.-Bipolar binary ramp converter.
resistors. 7.-Binary ramp converter with continuous monopolar
Female and male connectors, interconnections. counting.
Power supply. 8.-Binary ramp converter with bipolar continuous
counting.
LPF-Low Pass Filter: 2nd order low pass filter, needed to convert analog signals to digital. Sample/Hold 9.-Monopolar simple ramp.
module. Comparator module. Clock module. Analog switch. Ramp module. A/D control module. D/A 10.- Bipolar simple ramp converter.
module, including an integrated digital to analog converter. A/D module, including an integrated 11.- Monopolar double ramp converter.
analog to digital converter. Counter module. Waveform generator. 8 analog switches, all are managed 12.- Double bipolar ramp converter.
by a PC. Weighted resistors: 8 resistances are connected to a common point. D/A module: same 13.- Monopolar converter of successive approximations.
14.- Bipolar converter of successive approximations.
module than described before “D/A”. Analog input and output for PC. Serial lock 1 module. Adding 15.- Integrated Digital/Analog converter. Monopolar
module: same module as previously described ”Adding”. Serial lock 2 module: same module than serial assembly.
lock 1, but based only on an inverter. R/2R : stair of resistance R/2R. Potentiometer. D/A control module. 16.- Digital/Analog integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
Operational amplifier. Two capacities of 100nF with common connection.Sample/Hold module: same 17.- Digitalization and reconstruction of monopolar signals.
18.- Digitalization and reconstruction of bipolar signals.
module as previously described “Sample/Hold”. 19.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of weighted
Control Interface. resistance.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 20.- Digital/Analog bipolar converter of weighted
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. resistance.
21.- Analog switches errors.
Sampling rate up to:250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. 22.- R/2R monopolar stair converter.
3 CADDA/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: 23.- R/2R bipolar stair converter.
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, 24.-Current division in R/2R stairs.
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously 25.-Digital/Analog converter of monopolar inverted stair.
26.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of inverted stair.
on all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling 27.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of series blocking.
velocity up to 250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process 28.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of series blocking.
and modification of the conditions during the process. 29.-Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 30.-Bipolar Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
31.-Monopolar Digital/Analog converter of pulse width
modulation.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 450 x 470 mm. Weight: 40 Kg. 32.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of pulse width
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/CADDA.pdf modulation.
Page 24
Digital
2.5-Basic
2.1- Electronics
Electronics
TDS. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Digital Signal Processing
2.- Electronics
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2 3
Data Software for:
- Data Management
1 Unit: TDS. Teaching Unit for the Study of Digital 5 Manuals
Signal Processing, including Control Interface

1 TDS Unit: 1.- Continuous wave form generation,
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. with the impossibility of varying the
Steel box. frequency and amplitude of signals,
Front Panel:
besides of duty cycle.
2 Function generators modules, that can generate 3 different signals: sinusoidal, square and
triangular. Each one includes: wave forms selector, frequency selector, amplitude selector. 2.- Characterization of signals. To
Duty cycle selector. analyze the nature of the signals:
Signal output. sinusoidal, square, triangular and
Noise generator module, that can generate two noise type. Including: 2 noise outputs, attenuator sawtooth.
selector per each noise type.
3.- Possibility of working simultaneously
Microphone pre-amplifier module, including: input (microphone), outputs (2 connectors).
Power amplifier module, including: inputs (2 connectors), output (1 connector), volume selector. with two external signals.
Speaker module. 4.- Possibility of generating signals
PC input/output module, including: 2 inputs. 2 outputs. directly by the software and send
Power On/Off switch. them to the unit outputs and then
Lateral panel: visualizing or listening by the
SCSI connector for connecting with the data acquisition board (DAB) to be placed in the computer.
speaker or an external oscilloscope.
Back panel:
Power supply connector. 5.- Signal digitalization, permitting the
Safety fuse. most suitable sampling time,
Inside: avoiding “aliasing”.
Power supply. 6.- Digitalization of signals with the
2 Signal generation boards (PBC).
possibility of adjusting the sampling
White and pink noise generation board (PBC).
frequency.
Power amplifier board (PBC).
Pre-amplifier board (PBC). Control interface. 7.- Fast Fourier Transform (Power
Possibility of working simultaneously with two external signals, thanks to its inputs, facilitating operations that required more Spectrum).
than one signal.
8.- Addition, subtraction, multiplication,
Moreover it is possible to generate signals directly by the software and send them to the unit outputs and then visualizing by
convolution and auto-convolution of
an external oscilloscope or listening by the speaker.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: signals.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. 9.- Study of “aliasing”.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s.
10.- Application of the frequency
2 Analog outputs.
convolution theorem.
24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
3 TDS/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: 11.- Study of different noise types: White
Registration and visualization of signals in an automatic and simultaneously way. Uniform noise, White Gaussian
2 signals can be visualized simultaneously. noise,1/f noise, Poisson noise,
Flexible, open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all Random noise,Gamma noise.
process parameters.
Management, processing and comparison of data. 12.- Representation of the Bode
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. diagram and Nyquist diagram of
Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification of the conditions during the process. any transfer function, and phase
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. information.
13.- Study and use of filters:
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
- Possibility of filtration of any signal.
- Reconstructions of signals through
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/digital/TDS.pdf the application of filters.-Finite
Impulse Response (FIR) Filters.-
Infinite Impulse Response (IIR)
Filters.
- Possibility to use Bartlett, Hanning,
Hamming, Kaiser, Parzen, etc.
windows for applying on the signal.
2.6- Industrial Electronics
TECNEL. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Power Electronics. (Converters: DC/AC+AC/DC+DC/DC+AC/AC)
2.- Electronics
Electronics
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
Control
Interface
included
in the unit 2 3
Data Software for:
- Data Management
1 Unit: TECNEL. Teaching Unit for the Study of Power
5 Manuals
Electronics, including Control Interface.
(Converters: DC/AC+ AC/DC+DC/DC+AC/AC).

1TECNEL Unit: 1.- Single phase half-wave 11.- S i n g l e - p h a s e s e m i
Unit with Computer Control and Data Acquisition System designed to study the basis of Power rectifier with load R. controlled rectifier.
Electronics. It allows students to study AC/DC, DC/AC, DC/DC, AC/AC converters. 2.- Single phase half-wave 12.- Three-phase full-wave
Steel box. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. rectifier with load R-L. semi-controlled rectifier.
Front panel: Diodes module: 6 diodes. Thyristors module: 6 thyristors. IGBTS Module: 6 IGBTS. 3.- Single-phase half-wave 13.- Chopper.
Snubber net. Sensors module: 4 voltage sensors, 2 current sensors. Power supply rectifier with R-L load with 14.- Single-phase square-wave
connections for Vr, Vs, Vt, Neutral and Ground. Practices schemes. free wheeling diode inverter.
Back panel: Data Acquisition Board Connector (SCSI connector). Tachodynamo connector. Main fuses (FWD). 15.- Single-phase displaced
(Vr, Vs, Vt) and LEDs. Circuit breaker (main switch). 4.- Single-phase full-wave phase inverter.
Single-phase driver. Three-phase driver. IGBT driver. TSI board. PIC board. SKHI61 board. Four relays rectifier. 16.- Single-phase inverter.
board. 2 Three-phase relays. Commuted power supply. Three-phase magnetothermal. 5.- Three-phase half-wave PWM control.
Control interface. uncontrolled rectifier. 17.- Three -phase inverter.
6.- Three-phase full-wave PWM control with R load
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. uncontrolled rectifier. and R-L load.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
3 TECNEL/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
7.- Single-phase half-wave 18.- Three -phase inverter.
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, controlled rectifier. PWM control with AC
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously 8.- Single-phase full-wave motor.
on all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling controlled rectifier. 19.- Alternating regulators: R
velocity up to 250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the 9.- Single-phase full-wave and R-L load.
process and modification of the conditions during the process. controlled rectifier with a 20.- Asynchronous three-motor
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. DC motor. with rotor in short circuit
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 10.- Three-phase full-wave (squirrel cage).
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 40 Kg. completely controlled.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/industrial/
TECNEL.pdf
TECNEL/B. Computer Controlled Basic Teaching Unit for the Study of Power Electronics. (Converters: AC/DC+AC/AC)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
Control
Interface
included
in the unit 2 3
Data Software for:
- Data Management
5 Manuals
1 Unit: TECNEL/B. Basic Teaching Unit for the Study of Power

Electronics, including Control Interface.
(Converters: AC/DC+AC/AC).

1TECNEL/B Unit: 1.- Single phase half-wave rectifier with
Unit with Computer Control and Data Acquisition System designed to study the basis of Power Electrics. It allows students to load R.
study AC/DC, AC/AC converters. 2.- Single phase half-wave rectifier with
load R-L.
Steel box. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 3.- Single-phase half-wave rectifier
Front panel: Diodes module: 6 diodes. Thyristors module: 6 thyristors. Snubber net. Sensors module: 4 voltage sensors, 2 with R-L load with free wheeling
current sensors. Power supply connections for Vr, Vs, Vt, Neutral and Ground. Practices schemes. diode (FWD).
Back panel: Data Acquisition Board connector (SCSI connector). Tachodynamo connector. Main fuses (Vr, Vs, Vt) and LEDs. 4.- Single-phase full-wave rectifier.
Circuit breaker (main switch). 5.- T h r e e - p h a s e h a l f - w a v e
uncontrolled rectifier.
Single-phase driver. Three-phase driver. TSI board. Four relays board. 2 Three-phase relays. Commuted power supply. Three- 6.- Three-phase full-wave uncontrolled
phase magnetothermal. Control Interface. rectifier.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 7.- Single-phase half-wave controlled
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 rectifier.
KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. 8.- Single-phase full-wave controlled
rectifier.
3 TECNEL/B/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
9.- Single-phase full-wave controlled
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, open and multicontrol rectifier with a DC motor.
software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process parameters. Management, 10.- Three-phase full-wave completely
processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the controlled.
obtained data, after to the process and modification of the conditions during the process. 11.- Single -phase semi- controlled
rectifier.
12.- Three -phase full-wave semi-
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. controlled rectifier.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 35 Kg. 13.- Alternating regulators: R and R-L
load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/industrial/TECNEL-B.pdf
Page 26
2.1- Industrial
2.6-Basic Electronics
SERIN/CA. Computer Controlled Industrial Servosystems Trainer (for AC motors)
2.- Electronics
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2 Software for:
Control Interface Box - Computer Control
Motor - Data Acquisition
- Data Management
4 Manuals
1 Unit: SERIN/CA. Industrial Servosystems Trainer (for AC motors)
Items supplied as standard PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1 SERIN/CA Unit:
The SERIN/CA trainer consists on an Control Interface Box connected to a three-phase motor and to a PC. The control 1.-Homing.
interface has a resolver for three-phase motors that controls the speed, position and current of the
motor. The RS232 communication between the control interface and the PC provides the SERIN/CA the possibility of 2.-Clutch/Control.
commanding the motor from the PC and visualize the most important signals of the motor. Velocity, Position and Torque 3.-Turn movement (w/correction
Control. It allows predefined moves and programming.
Control Interface Box: phase).
Front panel: 4.-Registration movements.
3 Digital outputs: They have a green LED that indicates if the output is active or not. Emulative encoder outputs: two pair
of outputs (CH A Out, CH B Out and their respective denied outputs) that are TTL signals of incremental position 5.-Dry movements.
generated by the resolver feedback, and one pair of outputs (CH S Out and their denied) that TTL works as marker of 6.-Stop and blockade. Transitory
pulses. Analog output 4 (relay). Analog outputs of the DAC monitor: these analog outputs are monitored points of
general character. 6 digital inputs for those signals that are introduced to enable the different available functions in the states.
software. 6 buttons to enable the digital inputs. 6 switches, with the same function as the buttons, but with the only
difference that they are switches. Switch outfitter of digital inputs: there is a switch that enables the digital inputs. Analog 7.-Stop and blockade. Influence on
input: this input allows an analog use directly of the user. It is an A/D input. Voltage supply: 3 sources of D.C. in the unit the filtered velocity.
(+24 V. , +12V., and -12V. DC.) 2 Potentiometers. Ignition switch.
Back panel: 8.-Transitory velocity study.
Voltage supply (220 V A.C.). Three-phase output when solving: it is a three-phase output that feeds when you are solving 9.-Feedback gain manage.
and, therefore, allows their movement. Connection port in series: to connect the unit with the PC by the port in series.
Connection with the feedback: it is a connection with the motor feedback. It allows the encoder to manage the motor. 10.- M o d i f i c a t i o n of Fe e d b a c k
Motor: AC motor, 0.7kW, 2.8A ac, 4200 rpm, 320V dc. Sensor RESOLVER :1 Speed, 1X/RX, 3 phase. Parameters and Phases U, V and W.
2 SERIN/CA/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of signals in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, open and multicontrol software. 11.-Use and modification of the
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process feedback filters.
and modification of the conditions during the process.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 12.-Phase voltages U, V and W showing.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 40 Kg. Motor:410 x 170 x 150 mm. Weight: 5 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/industrial/SERIN-CA.pdf
SERIN/CC. Computer Controlled Industrial Servosystems Trainer (for DC motors)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
Control 2 Software for:

Interface Box - Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
Direct Current - Data Management
Motor and Encoder 3 Cables and Accessories
Module 4 Manuals
1 Unit: SERIN/CC. Industrial Servosystems Trainer (for DC motors)

1 SERIN/CC Unit: 1.- Autotuning.
It is formed by a Control Interface Box and a Direct Current Motor and Encoder Module. The Control Interface Box has a 4-
quadrants servo amplifier for DC motors that controls the motor speed, position and current of the motor. In order to do 2.- Manual tuning of the position
this control the feedback is done thanks to an encoder. The RS232 communication between the Control Interface Box and
the computer (PC) provides the possibility of commanding the motor from the PC and to visualize the most important signals regulator.
of the motor. The 4-quadrant servo amplifier controls the motor operation and the braking operation in both rotation 3.- Motion commands in MPBUS RS232
directions clockwise and counterclockwise. Velocity, Position and Torque Control.
It allows predefined moves and programming. Control Interface Box: mode.
Front panel:Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 4.- Signals Graph, Transient Analysis.
7 Digital outputs: They have led’s that indicate if the outputs are active or not. 13 Digital inputs: 7 user definable digital
inputs for process control,1 digital input (trigger signal), 3 digital inputs: reference, left limit and right limit, 2 digital 5.- Batch Commands.
inputs power stage and stop. 2 Analog inputs with voltages in the range of 0-5V. 2 Potentiometers to select the value of
the analog inputs (0-5 V DC). Ignition Switch. 6.- User´s parameters, Position Val.,
Back panel: velocity Val., Acceleration Val.
Voltage supply that feeds the unit with 220 V of alternating current. Motor power supply: it is a 24 V DC motor power
supply. Connection plug to connect the Control Interface with the PC by the RS-232 port, in order to allow the software 7.- Digital inputs and outputs in I/O
to manage the motor. Connection with the motor Feedback, it allows the encoder to manage the motor. mode.
Direct Current Motor and Encoder Module:
DC Motor, 90W, position, speed and current are controlled by the Control Interface. Digital encoder, 500 pulses per 8.- Load and braking simulation.
revolution, with RS232 communication port.
2 Power supply wires. 2 Communication RS232 wires. 9.- Searching reference.
2 SERIN/CC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: 10.- Input/Output functions.
Registration and visualization of signals in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, open and multicontrol
software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to 11.- State commands and Exception.
the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 12.- Velocity, Position and Torque control.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 40 Kg. Motor+Esconder Module:300x300x120 mm. Weight: 5Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/industrial/SERIN-CC.pdf
2.6- Industrial Electronics (continuation)
3
SERIN/CCB. Servosystems Trainer (DC motors)

2.- Electronics

“SERIN/CCB” is an unit whose goal is studing low Some Practical Possibilities of the Unit:
power servo systems. It is a low power DC motor speed 1.- Open loop control response.
control trainer that has a breakdown simulator. 2.- Demonstration of a stopping ramp functioning.
This trainer is a basic version of the Advanced and 3.- F unctioning of a PWM modulator and the response of
Computerised “SERIN/CC” Trainer, being advisable the system.
for an introductory study of closed and open loop 4.- Closed loop or feedback control through a Proportional
control systems. controller (P).
The trainer includes: 5.- Closed loop or feedback control through a Derivative
Base Unit: controller (I).
Steel box. Diagram in the front panel with similar 6.- Closed loop or feedback control through a Proportional-
distribution that the elements in the real unit. Integral controller (PI).
Electromechanic unit. Tachometric adaptor. 7.- Closed loop or feedback control through a Proportional-
Generation and control of set point. Ramp Derivative controller (PD).
generator, as well as of sinusoidal, triangular and 8.- A chievement of an over damped system using a closed
square wave generator. PWM modulator. loop system.
Open loop control. 9.- Achievement of a critically damped system using a closed
Close loop control: loop PID.
Proportional Control (P). Integrative 10.- Instability, a characteristic of closed loop system.
Proportional Control (PI). Proportional derivative 11.- Stabilisation of an unstable system.
Control (PD). Proportional Integrative derivative 12.- Fault simulation:
(PID). Type fault including on the unit:
Current limiter. Turn inversion control. Stop/starting Fault 1: The absolute value of the feedback signal from the
control. Power stage and excitation of the power tachogenerator is not calculated for its
stage. Brake control. subtraction from the reference, thus, for one of the
Fault simulator that allows the entries of a turning senses, the error is wrong.
considerable amount of disfunctions in order to the Fault 2: The value of the Proportional constant of the PID is
students diagnose its nature and find out the divided by ten with the user unable to detect it but
components that cause them. Possibility to make its effect.
entries of disfunctions in only one or in some Fault 3: The value of the Integral constant of the PID is
circuits. divided by ten with the user unable to detect it but
Direct current motor (DC) and tachometric generator. its effect.
Computer Control Software. Fault 4: The value of the Derivative constant of the PID is
Cables and accessories, necessary for its correct divided by ten with the user unable to detect it but
its effect.
operation.
Fault 5: The signal from the tachogenerator is modified,
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. making the PID control to believe that the speed is
Dimensions (approx.) =400 x 330 x 310 mm. ten times lower to the real one.
Weight: 10 Kg. None of these faults are exclusive, being possible to
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ combine them.
catalogues/en/units/electronics/industrial/
SERIN-CCB.pdf
SERIN/CAB. Servosystems Trainer (AC motors)
SERIN/CACC. Computer Controlled Industrial Servosystems Trainer (for AC and DC motors)
Page 28
Summarized
Catalogue
two (2)
3.- Communications
3. Communications
page
3.1. Analog Communications &

3.2. Digital Communications. 30-34
3.3. Telephony. 35
3.4. Global Positioning Systems (GPS) 35
www.edibon.com
Page 29
3.1- Analog Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
3
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
2 Modules 1 Power Supply 2 Modules
(power supply needed) (power supply needed)
FA-CO Available digital
Available analog
communications modules: communications modules:
3.- Communications
(EDICOM1)
(ED-CAM)
or
EBC-100
(EDICOM2)
(ED-CFM)
3 CAI.Computer Aided Instruction Software System

Teaching
Technique
used
INS/SOF. Instructor Software (EDICOM3)
+
4 LICOMBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software

(Results Calculation and Analysis) (EDICOM4)
Teaching
Technique
used
(EDICOM5)

Teaching
Technique
used
(EDICOM6)

Software
The Complete Laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply
+ Module/s is the minimum supply).
Available Modules
Analog Communications Digital Communications
- ED-CAM. AM Communications. - EDICOM 1. Signals Sampling and Reconstruction.

- ED-CFM. FM Communications. - EDICOM 2. Time Division Multiplex (TDM). PAM Transmitter and Receiver.
- EDICOM 3. MIC-TDM Transmission/Reception.
- EDICOM 4. Delta Modulation and Demodulation.
- EDICOM 5. Line codes. Signal Modulation and Demodulation.
- EDICOM 6. Optical Fibre Transmission and Reception.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/analog/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 30
2.1- Analog
3.1-Basic Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Power Supply
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply

3.- Communications
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from ED-CAM, ED-CFM and EDICOM type.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight:2Kg approx.
EBC-100. Base Unit (optional) SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY

Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector.
This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from ED-CAM, ED-CFM and EDICOM type.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight:2Kg approx.
2 Modules
They consist on electronic boards which permit the student to do the exercises/practices corresponding to the target subject. On these modules the circuits to be designed are
serigraphed. Real components are displayed to familiarize the student with them. There are many points where measures can be taken (voltage, current intensity, resistance,
etc.). Moreover, circuit and electronic component faults can be simulated too. Every Module has its own manual, that gives the theoretical knowledge and explains everything
the student needs to carry out the exercise /practice. We provide eight manuals per module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included.
Power supply needeed.
Dimensions (approx.) of each module= 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Analog Communications
ED-CAM. AM Communications
The module consist of two different boards: 1.- Analysis of the main features of the transmitter and the
One is the transmitter, the other one the receiver.
Communication between them may be through connecting cables or receiver.
by antennas. 2.- Analysis of modulation:
Modulation study:
D.S.B.: Double Sideband. D.S.B.: Double Sideband.
S.S.B.: Single Sideband. S.S.B.: Single Sideband.
DSB-SC: Double Sideband with Suppressed Carrier. 3.- Signal modulation using AM-DSB :
Also contains an audio amplifier and a loudspeaker. Adjustable audio
volume through the amplifier. Carrier modulation.
Output signal selector through loudspeaker or headphones. Amplitude modulation.
Sixteen error commuter switches (eight per board).
Telescopic antenna. Frequency modulation.
Numbered testing points for measurements using an oscilloscope. Analysis of DSB modulation.
Transmitter specifications:
DSB output frequency: 1 Mhz. SSB output frequency:1.4 MHz. Diode detector operation.
DSB MODULATOR, consisting of: a crystal oscillator (1 Superheterodyne receiver operation.
MHz.); a balanced modulator and a band-pass filter N.1; and
a ceramic pass-band filter. AM-DSB signal reception and demodulation.
SSB MODULATOR, consisting of: an oscillator of 455 Generation of DSB modulated signals.
kHz.; a balanced modulator; a ceramic pass-band filter; and 4.- Signal modulation using AM- SSB :
a balanced modulator and pass-band filter N.2
Receiver specifications: Analysis of SSB modulation.
Type: Superheterodyne. Analysis of the AM-SSB demodulator.
Two Detectors:
Detector diode for demodulation of AM-DSB. Analysis of BFO (heterodyne oscillator).
Product detector for demodulation of AM-SSB. AM-SSB signal reception and demodulation.
Frequency range: 525 Hz. to 1605 KHz.
Intermediate frequency: 455 KHz. 5.- Analysis of the Image Frequency.
Blocks: Local oscillator; BFO; Product detector; 6.- Adjustment of Tuning Circuits.
Radio-frequencyamplifier; mixer; two intermediate -
frequency amplifiers; AGC (automatic gain control); and an 7.- Error Generator.
audio amplifier.
en/units/communications/analog/LICOMBA.pdf
ED-CFM. FM Communications
The module consists of a single board for studying FM 1.- Introduction:
communications, including transmission and reception, and also noise
effects existing in communication. Main features of the FM transmitter-receiver board.
The board includes two frequency modulators and five discriminator 2.- FM Modulation:
circuits. Analysis of the reactor modulator.
Alternatively it is possible to modulate the amplitude of the FM signal
using an external noise input signal. Analysis of the varactor modulator.
Transmitter: 3.- Frequency Demodulation Techniques:
Modulator circuits: Reactor and Varactor. Analysis of the Untuned Resonant Circuit.
Output frequency: 455 KHz.
Frequency range of the audio oscillator: 300 Hz. to 3.4 KHz. Analysis of the Quadratic Detector.
Receiver: Analysis of the Foster-Seeley Detector.
Demodulator circuits: Tuner resonator, square-law Analysis of the Ratio Detector.
detector, ratio discriminator, synchronous detector, and a
Foster-Seeley discriminator. Analysis of the Closed-Loop Phase Detector Circuit.
Low-pass filter/Amplifiers. 4.- Adjustment of Tuning Circuits.
Filter cutoff frequency: 3.4 KHz. 5.- Error Generator.
Eight commuter switches.
Testing points for measurements using an oscilloscope.
en/units/communications/analog/LICOMBA.pdf
3.1- Analog Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications (continuation)
3
Digital Communications
EDICOM1. Signals Sampling and Reconstruction
3.- Communications
The module consists of a board for studying the principles of Sampling 1.- Description of the principles of signal sampling and
Theorem. Internally the board generates a 1 KHz. signal which shall be reconstructions.
used as the transmitted signal, as well as five different sampling
frequency signals. The board also contains a circuit for calculating the 2.- Visualization of the main signals involved in a sampling
time percentage used in each sampling period when the signal is process.
sampled.
Sampling frequencies: 2,4,8,16, and 32 KHz. 3.- Analysis of the whole signal sampling and reconstruction
Sampling utilization factor: variable 0-90% using 10% stepping. cycle.
Two low-pass filters; cutoff frequency: 3.4 KHz., of 2nd. and 4th. order, 4.- Comparison of the use of a 2nd. against 4th. order filter in
for receiving, as the filter's order increases its gradient is stronger,
allowing a better reconstruction. the recovery process of a signal.
There is an output for the sampled signal, and another for the sampling 5.- Faults simulation.
and maintenance of the signal.
There exists the possibility of introducing a sampled or pure signal,
external to the board.
Allows faults simulation.
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
EDICOM2. Time Division Multiplexing (T.D.M.).PAM Transmitter and Receiver

This module consists of a board for studying Pulse Amplitude
Modulation and Demodulation (PAM), and Time Division Multiplex 1.- Analysis of the principles of Time Division Multiplex
(TDM). Sampling and time division multiplex are analyzed for each (TDM).
channel. 2.- Analysis of the features of the Transmitter, the Receiver and all
It includes analog tetrapolar switches installed both in the transmitter
and the receiver for channel multiplexing and demultiplexing. the other circuits.
Input channels: 4 TDM and PAM. 3.- Comparison between different operation modes, varying
Analog channels: 250 Hz., 500 Hz, 1 KHz, and 2 KHz. with their connections.
Sampling frequency: 16 KHz per channel. 4.- Faults simulation.
Sampling utilization factor: variable with transmission from 0 to 90%
using 10% steps per channel.
Analog channels: 250 Hz., 500 Hz, 1 KHz, and 2 KHz, variable
amplitude with potentiometer.
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency: 3.4 KHz.
Three operation modes, allowing verification of the receiver's
complexity and channel usage, depending on the transmitted
information. Possibility of transmitting externally supplied signals.
The board permits introducing faults simulation using a
switchboard, thus enabling the student to study in depth the board's
operation and localization of faults.
EDICOM3. MIC-TDM Transmission/Reception

This module consists of two boards for studying the modulation
of a two-channel MIC-TDM system: 1.- Analysis of transmission in a two-channel MIC-TDM system.
Transmission board (EDICOM 3.1). 2.- Study of the transmitter characteristic codes.
Reception board (EDICOM 3.2).
Here is analyzed analog signal transmission using two-channel 3.- Analysis of receiver operation varying the transmitter output
sampling, multiplexing, and coding, thus generating a lay transmitted signal.
to the receiver which recovers the two analog signals. 4.- Use of synchronizing code sequences for data transmission.
The module also allows checking error codes. 5.- Use of the clock generation circuit for reducing connections
Input channels: two PCM channels.
Codes generated by the transmitter: pseudo random for the between transmitter and receiver to a single one.
synchronizing signal. 6.- Faults simulation.
Error checking: even and odd parity, and Hamming code.
Includes two continuos signal generators of 1 and 2 KHz, and another
two direct current signal generators, all of them of variable amplitude
using potentiometer.
Possibility of faults simulation.
EDICOM4. Delta Modulation and Demodulation

This module consists of a board for studying Delta, Adaptive Delta and
Delta/Sigma Modulation. 1.- Analysis of Delta, Adaptive Delta, and Delta Sigma
Delta modulation transforms an analog signal into a stream of digital Modulation.
data, transmitting one bit every time the analog signal is sampled. Later 2.- Construction of a Delta Modulator/Demodulator system.
on the analog signal must be rebuilt at the receiver.
This modulation has some drawbacks depending on various 3.- Construction of an Adaptive Delta Modulator/Demodulator
parameters, for example the variation slope of the analog signal to be system.
transmitted at the sampling frequency. Due to this there are different 4.- Construction of a Sigma-Delta Modulator/Demodulator
types of delta modulation.
This module allows to show the three main deltas: Delta modulation. system.
Adaptive-delta modulation. Sigma-delta modulation.
This allows the study of the parameters: sampling frequency, sampling
step size, and analog input signal frequency and amplitude. Sampling
frequencies: 32, 64, 128, and 256 KHz.
Low-pass "Butterworth” filter with cutoff frequency at 3.4 KHz.
Transmitter and receiver in-built integrators enabling selection of four
different gains using switches or automatic gain variation.
Includes four input signals at 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 KHz, and 2 KHz, and
also a direct current signal, all of them of variable amplitude and
potentiometer, as well as the possibility of introducing an external
signal.
Page 32
2.1- Analog
3.1-Basic Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
Digital Communications (continuation)
EDICOM5. Line Codes. Signal Modulation and Demodulation
3.- Communications
This module consists of two boards for studying data conditioning: 1.- Analysis of line codes used for short-distance digital
Transmission board (EDICOM 5.1): for data coding and trans-mission: NRZ(L), NRZ(M), RZ, AMI, RB, Two-phase
signal modulation.
Reception board (EDICOM 5.2): for signal demodulation (Manchester), and Two-phase (Mark).
and data decoding. 2.- Relationship between binary mode and modulation rate.
The aim is to study carrier modulation/demodulation techniques: ASK, 3.- Analysis of digital modulation techniques: ASK, PSK, FSK,
PSK, FSK, and QPSK. and QPSK, studying their features at the transmitter and the
Also to study data coding formats: NRZ(L), NRZ(M), RZ, Two-phase
demodulation at the receiver.
(Manchester), and Two-phase (Mark).
Carrier wave frequency: 1.44 MHz, (I) 960 KHz, (Q) 960 KHz. 4.- Faults simulation.
It Includes two carrier modulators and two unipolar-bipolar converters. 5.- Requires “EDICOM 3” module.
Elements: a data inverter, an amplifier-adder, and bit decoder installed
in the receiver.
For completing the practices, it is necessary to use the boards of
Module EDICOM 3.
The EDICOM 5.2 board contains all the demodulators and circuitry
needed for recovering the signal.
Faults simulation.
EDICOM6. Fibre Optic Transmission/Reception

This module consists of one board for studying optical fibre 1.- Analysis of optical fibre transmission and reception.
transmission and reception.
Different methods comprising the modulation of a light source are 2.- Analysis of the various methods used for modulating a beam
described: amplitude modulation, frequency modulation, signal pulse- of light: amplitude modulation and pulse-width modulation.
width modulation; as well as their subsequent recovery and 3.- Analysis of the transmission of digital signals using optical
reconstruction. fibre.
Transmission medium: optical fibre cable. Sources: analog and digital.
Two optical fibre transmission and reception circuits. Maximum 4.- Faults simulation.
transmitter frequency: 300 KHz. 4th order low-pass filter with cutoff
frequency at 3.4 KHz. Interface RS232.
This module may be used together with EDICOM 4 to enable its better
use, though it may also be used independently.
Faults simulation.
3
Software
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Module + Student/Module Software. Both are interconnected so that the teacher knows at any
moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students. These, on the
Instructor Student/Module other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the information on
Software Software the subject of study.

- Print reports.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module Software).

It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, showing how to
complete the circuits and get the right information from them.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
Analog Communications: - EDICOM 2/SOF. Time Division Multiplex(TDM). PAM Transmitter and Receiver.
- ED-CAM/SOF. AM Communications. - EDICOM 3/SOF. MIC-TDM Transmission/Reception.
- ED-CFM/SOF. FM Communications. - EDICOM 4/SOF. Delta Modulation and Demodulation.
Digital Communications - EDICOM 5/SOF. Line codes. Signal Modulation and Demodulation.
- EDICOM 1/SOF. Signals Sampling and Reconstruction. - EDICOM 6/SOF. Optical Fibre Transmission/Reception.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
3.1- Analog Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications (continuation)
3
3 Software (continuation)
4 LICOMBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.*Although only the
purchased areas will be activated and ready to use.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
3.- Communications
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against

any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
Data Acquisition
Data acquisition EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS system,
1 Cables to
interface
and virtual
instrumentation
information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
2
Connection software represented.
Data acquisition
points We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
3
board
4 Data acquisition Cable

cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
“n”
interface box to
computer
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Student
Module post Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
(electronic board) the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF.

5.1)Hardware:
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer. DAIB
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
a computer slot. This is a similar version to the 1.25, with the
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2. DAB
It works as:
Page 34
3.3- Telephony
CODITEL. Telephony Systems Trainer
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
EDIBON Computer Control System
3.- Communications
2
Computer
Computer Control (not included
Software in the supply)

4 Manuals
1 Unit: CODITEL.
Telephony Systems Trainer

1 CODITEL. Trainer: Some Practical Possibilities of the Unit
CODITEL is a digital circuit commutation unit for didactic purposes. Its structure is like a temporal commutator structure with
1.- To study the main actions and signals
two MIC ways, one inlet way and one outlet way. Basically, it follows the recommendation of the CCITT and of Telephony.
System is mounted on a desktop box. involved in a digital commutation.
Diagram in the front panel of the unit with the same structure as the real hardware. Provides access to all main signals. 2.- To study the dynamic channel
Follows all the recommendations of CCITT (Cosultive Comitte International Telephony and Telegraphy). Structure is based on
the standard for digital commutation systems. assignment and temporal switching.
Time division multiplexing(TDM) and Pulse code Modulation (PCM) principles. 3.- To study the standards for audio
Communication based on a temporal commutator that supports up to fifteen complete internal communications with two MIC
conversion.
ways, one inlet way and one outlet way.
Standard MIC system of 32 channels with dynamic assignament and frame synchronization. 30 channels used for voice 4.- To establish of a communication
transmission and 2 used for signalling and synchronism. Signal conversion using standard codec, 8 KHz of sample rate, 8 bits between some channels step by step.
per sample and 64Kb/s per channel and 2,048 Mb/s system frame.
Internal hardware consists of two electronics boards: an analog board with all integrated and discrete analog elements and a 5.- Visual monitoring of the main states
digital board based on FPGA technology. that a line goes through during a call.
Structure integrated with all the internal common elements in a telephone system: subscriber´s line, tone generator, base of
times, filtering stage, switching matrix, number decoders and control memory. 6.- To configure lines as only receiver,
Two subscriber`s lines implemented with discrete elements (hybrid coils, ring circuit, supply circuit). transmitter, receiver / transmitter.
Two subscriber`s lines implemented with integrated elements Subscriber`s Line Interface Circuits (SLIC).
Functions as battery feed, overvoltage protection, ringing, coding and decoding, supervision, signalling, 2-4 wires conversion 7.- To test of the conversion from 2 to 4
and test( BORSCHT functions) covered, in each line. wires.
High precision digital tone synthetizer 400 Hz (dial invitation tone, call recapturing tone and busy tone) using Direct Digital
8.- To study the electric stages when the
Synthetizer (DDS).
Four commercial receptors (telephones), two used for signaling by pulses and other two for tones or Dual Tone Multi user makes actions over the
Frequency Signalling (DTMF). telephone.
Switching memory matrix, control memory and base of times implemented with FPGA technology with high stability and
fiability. 9.- To study the signals involved when
Standard RS232 protocol for communication between the PC and the trainer. dialing by pulses.
2 CODITEL/CCSOF. Computer Control and Graphic Visualization Software:
10.- To study the signals involved when
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. It is executed under windows operating system 2000 or higher.
Compatible with the industry standards. dialing by tones.
In combination with the hardware, Coditel Software is supplied with the system. 11.- To study the tone signal.
Coditel software has a user friendly graphical interface that provides totally control and visualization of the telephone system.
4 Manuals: this unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/es/units/communications/telephony/CODITEL.pdf
3.4- Global Positioning Systems (GPS)

EGPS. GPS Trainer
This EGPS trainer will provide a basic understanding of the GPS 1.- To understand the concept of GPS.
Fundamentals, Satellite & Design Aspects of GPS Receiver by actually 2.- Navigation concepts.
connecting to the Satellite by GPS Antenna. 3.- Noise and signal to noise ratio
concepts.
Metallic box. 4.- Establishing link between GPS
Power Supply. Satellite & GPS trainer.
5.- To Study effect of DOP.
GPS Unit. 6.- Study of HDOP & VDOP.
Serial Cable M/F. 7.- Measurement of longitude &
Mains lead. latitude.
8.- Study of useful conversion formulas.
GPS Antenna. 9.- Study of UTC data and time.
Software CD. 10.- Study of PRN code.
PC Interface - RS232 Port. 11.- Anaysis of NMEA 0183 protocols.
12.- Study of Common N MEA Sentence
Cables and accessories, for normal operation. Protocol like, GPGGA, GPGLL,
Manuals: this unit is supplied with 8 manuals. GPGSA, GPGSV, GPRMC, GPVTG.
13.- Other GPS NMEA Sentenses like,
Dimensions (approx.): 310 x 220 x 145 mm. Weight: 3 Kg. GPALM, GPGRS, GPGST, GPMSS,
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ GPZDA.
units/communications/appliedcommunications/EGPS.pdf 14.- Analysis of Elevation Azimuth SNR.
Summarized
Catalogue
two (2)
4. Electricity
page
4.1. Basic Electricity. 37-56

4.2. Electricity Demonstration. 56
4.3. Electrical Installations 56
Workshop.
4.4. Electrical Machines. 57-71
4.5. Electrical Machines Kits. 72
www.edibon.com
Page 36
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1 Frame 2 APPLICATIONS
2 APPLICATIONS (applications support)
(AD1A) (AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
High Safety anchorage system
Automatic earth
(AD3A) connection system (AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules

allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5) (AI4)
(AD6A) (AI5)
Sight of the frame
4.- Electricity
with some modules allocated

(AD8) Teaching
Technique (AE7)
used
INS/SOF. Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
(AD9A) (AE8)
4 MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13) (AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data

acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS Other APPLICATIONS

TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations: ! Industrial Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station. AD22. Flooding control station. AI1. Star-delta starter. AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o - contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AD3A. Fire alarm station. AD23. Wireless basic control transformer. AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AD5. Temporization of stairs. station (RF). AI3. Speed commutator for AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
AD6A. Luminosity control station. AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r Dahlander motor. ! Energy Installations:
AI4. Starter-inverter. AE1. Aerial line model.
AD8. Blinds activator. domestic electric services AI5. AC wound rotor motor AE2. Reactive energy control and
AD9A. Heating control station. through the telephone. starter. compensation.
AD11A. Network analyzer. AD28A. Integral control station of AI6. DC motor starter. AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
domestic electric systems. AI7. Automatic change of speed switches.
AD13. Audio door entry system. of a Dahlander motor with AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AD14. Audio and video door AD30. Gas control station. change of direction. AE5. Relay control station.
entry system. AD31. Movement and sound AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m - AE6. Energy counters control station.
detection and control. pensation (Power factor AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
AD15A. Position control station. correction). station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t AE8. Power & torque measurements of
position station. analyzer. indirect electrical contacts electrical motors.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s in TT neutral regimen. AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
AD24. Position Switch. AI10. People safety against indirect Directional power flow detection. Reactive
AD19A. Sound station. simulator. electrical contacts in TN power flow detection.
neutral regimen.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY

Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
Applications
4.- Electricity
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations

AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). alarm.
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights. 4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station

Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). alarm.
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control. 2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central. 3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
SEL21. Indoor Siren. 4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
DET10. Water Electro-valve. 5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector. fire.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs

Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs. 3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station

Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the control station.
COM14. 2 Commutators. 2.- Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. 3.- Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac. 4.- Test of the station by movement sensor.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps. 5.- Luminosity control.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp. 6.- Complete control.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
Page 38

2 Applications (continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector. 2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
DET20. Light Detector. 3.- Blind activation by sensors.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
AD9A. Heating Control Station

Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating. 2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units). 3.- Test with several temperatures.
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
AD11A. Network Analyzer
Included Modules:
4.- Electricity
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A). frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz). of a 220V single-phase circuit.
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V). 2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V. frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V. of a 380V three-phase circuit.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the system.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- To check the interphone operation.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System

Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the system.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock. 2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with sensors.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches. 3.- Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP. 4.- Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor. sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor. 5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station

Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the control station.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units). 3.- Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor. 4.- Test of the detection with compact sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor. 5.- Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor). 6.- Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter). 7.- Test with only emitters and receptors.
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
AD24. Position Switch
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply. 2.- MBB Micro-switch.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac). 3.- BBM Micro-switch.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
AD19A. Sound Station

Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Mono-stereo system installation.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator. 2.- Mono system with warnings reception.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units). 3.- Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
AUD06. Basic Audio Central. 4.- Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator. 5.- Background Music installation.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
4.- Electricity
AD22. Flooding Control Station SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the flooding control.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe). 3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)

Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
Included Modules: 1.- Smoke detection.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Gas detection and electro-valve control.
CTR01. Basic Control Module. 3.- Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units). 4.- Temperature and Battery.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe). 5.- Intrusion detection.
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control. 6.- Wireless detection.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve. 7.- Complete control of home electric services through the
DET12. Gas Electro-valve. telephone.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems

Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the complete system with the smoke,
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). flooding and gas detectors.
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W. 2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
CTR07. Timers Module. detectors.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V. 3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules. 4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
CTR18. Infrared Receptor. instrusion detectors.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe). 5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control. detectors.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control. 6.- Electro-valves activation.
DET10. Water Electro-valve. 7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
DET12. Gas Electro-valve. control.
VAR08. Monitor.
Page 40

AD30. Gas Control Station
Included Modules: 1.- Gas detection.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Electro-valve activation.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control

Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light. 2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
Included Modules:
4.- Electricity
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc). 2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator

Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units). 2.- Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units). 3.- Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units). 4.- Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
LAM01. Lamps. 5.- Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units). base.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp. 6.- To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
MED65. Digital Multimeter. 7.- To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box. 8.- To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 9.- To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the starter.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)). 2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C. 3.- Measurement of the star current and delta current.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac). 4.- Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 1.- Assembly of the starter.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units). 2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer. 3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the commutator.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C. motor.
MED60. Network Analyzer. 3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
Included Modules:
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 1.- Assembly of the starter.
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac). 2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer. 3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the starter.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
AI6. DC Motor Starter

4.- Electricity
Included Modules: PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Direct starter.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor). 2.- Starter rheostat.
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A, 2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
Curve C. and consumption measurements.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units). 3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units). speed.
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units). 4.- Change to low speed.
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor). 5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)

Included Modules: 1.- Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
3.- Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W. 4.- Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
5.- Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF. 6.- Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units). 7.- Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters. 8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W. 2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
COM12.Commutator/Switch. switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac). 3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen

Included Modules: PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units). 1.- Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer. 2.- Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA, 3.- Indirect contact with defect mass.
class A. 4.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W. TN-C conditions.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf TN-S conditions.
Page 42

Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Study of an isolation simple fault. 5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units). 2.- Study of an isolation double fault
CPA. Isolation Permanent Controller. (only with one mass).
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W. 3.- Study with several masses.
Resistance 10 W.
More information in: 4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Direct starting of a three-phase phase motor with microswitch and
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). motor through contactor, with some push-buttons box.
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2 stop and start push-buttons. 10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
units). 2.- Configuration of a magnetic inverter of a three-phase motor.
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps. protection system, with stop mush 11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units). room button. three-phase motor.
VAR09. Frequency variator. 3.- Direct starting of a three-phase 12.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
motor by GV protector with a switch. phase motor with microswitch, with
4.- Electricity
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module 4.- Direct starting of a three-phase start push-buttons, stop and
(2 units). motor through impulses contactor. function cycle. (Direct).
REL45. Module with disjunctor. 5.- Direct starting of a three-phase 13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic motor by GV protector with push- three-phase motor.
Switch,4A,Curve C buttons and signalling. 14.- Control of a single phase motor
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power 6.- Direct starting of a three-phase direct and, with time-delay
fuses. motor by GV protector with two connection and disconnection.
boxes of push-buttons and 15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom signalling.
made). single- phase voltage.
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made). 7.- Turning inverted starter of a three- 16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
phase motor stopping before turning 17.-Parameters of the motor through
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage). in the opposite direction.
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor). software.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a three- 18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor. phase motor without stopping before
More information in: motor.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ turning in the opposite direction.
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf 9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics

Included Modules:
Estatic Electricity: 28.-Identification, coils measurement
ALI10. Power Supply Module 1.- Static electricity checking,with an and starting-up of a single-phase
CAR30. Inductances Module electroscope and anelectrometer. motor.
CAR31. Capacitors Module 2.- Static electricity experiments. 29.-Identification, measurement and
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current starting-up of an universal motor.
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module (AC): 30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
3.- Ohm´s law verification. starting-up of a three phase motor.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp Transformers:
4.- Installation of the resistive components
LAM26. Lighting Module module. 31.-Experiments and practices with a
MED65.Digital Multimeter 5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series. dismantled transformer.
REL50. Relays Module. 6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel. 32.-Identification of the three-phase
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage) 7.- Power measurement of a resistive transformer.
circuit. 33.-Connection as single-phase
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor. transformer.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
TRA28. Three-phase transformer parallel. 34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of 9.- Connection of lamps in series. 35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
motor/generator 10.-Lamps in parallel. connection .
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit 11.-Analysis of the variable resistances 36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
response curve. connection.
VAR18. Electrostatic kit 37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
VAR25. Open Universal Motor. 38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of 39.-Transformer with coils in series in
More information in: Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of phase.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf and Norton´s Theorem. 40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
15.-Application of the superposition 41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
theorem. 42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta. 43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the 44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
alternating current. 45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle Rectification and filtrate:
among voltages (AC). 46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
Dynamic Electricity: response curve.
19.- Identification of the components of the 47.-Half wave rectification .
trainer. 48.-Rectification to feed the universal
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of motor.
the measurement instruments 49.-Double wave rectification with two
Electric capacity: windings.
21.-Load and unload analysis of a 50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
capacitor. 51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and 52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electromagnetic induction: Electric circuits:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction. 53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction. 54.-Lamps controlled from two points
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment. and from three points.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets). 55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
Motors: 56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
26.-Electric motors 57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
27.-Generators.
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- Measurement of the voltage without loads.
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- Measurement of the voltage with loads.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA. 4.- Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model. 5.- Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
TRA18. Petersen Coil. Petersen coil.
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set with inductive load.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
4.- Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches

Included Modules:
1.- To connect the set.
4.- Electricity

CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W. 2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C. switch breaks.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made). 3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
AE5. Relay Control Station

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- To connect the transformers to line.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth. 2.- To connect the protection relay.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). 3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W. 2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. counter.
MED72. Energy Counter.
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station

Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- To simulate faults in the line.
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included). parameters.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. 4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors

Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac). and the torque of the motor.
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A). 3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
Page 44

Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the set.
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 2.- Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac). 3.- To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load. 4.- To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. certain limit.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
Software
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this

complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
4.- Electricity
Application
(several modules)
+ the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
Instructor Student/Application students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
Software Software all the information on the subject of study.

- Print reports.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application

Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:

! Domestic Electrical Installations: AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic AI6/SOF. DC motor starter. ! Energy Installations:
AD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm Station. electric services through the AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station. telephone. speed of a Dahlander AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs. AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of motor with change of compensation.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l domesticelectric systems. direction. AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
station. AD30/SOF. Gas control station. AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m - automaticswitches.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator. AD31/SOF. Movement and sound pensation (Power factor AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station. detection and control. correction). automatic switches.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer. AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits AI9/SOF. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y analyzer. indirect electrical c o n t a c t s AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
system. AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s inTT neutral regimen. station.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door simulator. AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
entry system. Industrial Electrical Installations: electrical contacts in TN protection station.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station. AI1/SOF. Star-delta starter. neutral regimen. AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control AI2/SOF. Starter through auto- AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect of electrical motors.
position station. transformer. electrical contacts in IT neutral AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
AD24/SOF. Position Switch. AI3/SOF. Speed commutator for regimen. detection. Directional power
AD19A/SOF.Sound station. Dahlander motor. AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors). flow detection. Reactive
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station. AI4/SOF. Starter-inverter. AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r power flow detection.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control AI5/SOF. AC wound rotor motor Electrotecnics.
station (RF). starter.
Data Acquisition
4 4 MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
Cables to Data acquisition analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
1
2
interface software MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
(MUAD/SOF)
3
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
Data acquisition
Connections
points We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
(DAB)
4
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
board
“n” Electric power Cable to
interface box computer
Student placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
Application (EPIB) post (DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:

1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
4.- Electricity
Analog Input Channels: EPIB

8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :

PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536. DAB
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :

Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.

MUAD/SOF
See NEW UNITS of this Area in this link: www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=electricity&subarea=basic&lang=en
Page 46
ELE-KITS. Electrical Installations Assembly Kits:
1 Installation Cubicle
2 KITS (kits supports) 2 KITS
(KD1A) (KI1)
(BAS-K)
(KD3A) (KI3)
(KD5)
(KD6A) 3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System (KI5)
4.- Electricity
Teaching
Technique
used
INS/SOF. Instructor Software
(KD8) (AI6)
K.../SOF.
Student/Kit Software
(KD9A) (KE7)
4 MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
DAB. Data adquisition board

(KD13) (KE8)
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other KITS Other KITS
The complete system includes part 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Installation Cubicle + one Kit + Manuals.
Available Kits
!Domestic Electrical Installations: !Industrial Electrical Installations:
KD1A. Robbery alarm station kit. KD19A. Sound station kit. KI1. Star-delta starter kit. KI10. Kit of people safety against indirect
KD22. Flooding control station KI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o - electrical contacts in TN neutral regimen.
KD3A. Fire alarm station kit. kit. KI11. Kit of People safety against indirect
transformer kit. electrical contacts in IT neutral regimen.
KD5. Temporization of stairs kit. KD23. Wireless basic control KI3. Speed commutator for !Energy Installations:
KD6A. Luminosity control station station (RF) kit. Dahlander motor kit. KE1. Aerial line model kit.
kit. KD25A. Kit of control station for KI4. Starter-inverter kit. KE2. Kit of reactive energy control and
KD8. Blinds activator kit. domestic electric services KI5. AC wound rotor motor compensation.
through the telephone. starter kit. KE3. Kit of test unit for magneto-thermal
KD9A. Heating control station kit. KD28A. Kit of integral control automatic switches.
KD11A. Network analyzer kit. KI6. DC motor starter kit. KE4. Kit of test unit for differential automatic
station of domestic electric KI7. Kit of automatic change of switches.
KD13. Audio door entry system kit. systems. speed of a Dahlander motor KE5. Relay control station kit.
KD14. Audio and video door entry KD30. Gas control station kit. with change of direction. KE6. Energy counters control station kit.
KD31. Movement and sound KI8. Kit of reactive power com- KE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
system kit. station kit.
KD15A. Position control station kit. detection and control kit. pensation (Power factor KE8. Kit of power & torque measurements of
KD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits correction). electrical motors.
KD17A. P h o t o e l e c t r i c c o n t r o l analyzer kit. KI9. Kit of people safety against KE9. Kit of directional relay: Earth fault
position station kit. KD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s indirect Electrical contacts detection. Directional power flow
KD24. Position switch kit. simulator kit. in TT neutral regimen. d e t e c t i o n . Re a c t i v e p o w e r f l o w
detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/ELE-KITS.pdf
ELE-KITS. Electrical Installations Assembly Kits: (continuation)
1 Installation Cubicle
BAS-K Installation Cubicle
All sides panel with rear and side walls and roof.
Standard dimensions: 1200 x 1000 x 2000 mm.
Other dimensions available on request.
2 Kits
Domestic Electrical Installations
KD1A. Robbery alarm station kit
Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
DET27-K. Glass Break Detector. alarm.
INT32-K. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units). 3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
4.- Electricity
SEL03-K. 3 Pilot-Lights. 4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.

SEL21-K. Indoor Siren.
VAR07-K. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/ELE-KITS.pdf
KD3A. Fire alarm station kit

Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). alarm.
ALA02-K. Fire Alarm Station (with battery). 2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
DET06-K. Smoke Detector for domestic control. 3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
DET21-K. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central. 4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
SEL21-K. Indoor Siren. 5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
DET10-K. Water Electro-valve.
fire.
DET22-K. Fire Thermal Detector.
SEL17-K. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
KD5. Temporization of stairs kit

Included Elements:
1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
CTI10-K. Automatic of Stairs. 3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
INT21-K. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.(2 units).
LAM08-K. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.(2 units).
LAM13-K. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps.(2 units).
KD6A. Luminosity control station kit

Included Elements: 1.- Assembly of the control station.
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
COM14-K. 2 Commutators. 3.- Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
LAM08-K. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. 4.- Test of the station by movement sensor.
REG06-K. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W 5.- Luminosity control.
/230Vac. 6.- Complete control.
INT18-K. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10-K. 2 Halogen Lamps.
LAM09-K. Fluorescent Lamp.
SEN26-K. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
KD8. Blinds activator kit

Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
INT22-K. 2 Switches for Blinds.
3.- Blind activation by sensors.
DET19-K. Twilight Detector.
DET20-K. Light Detector.
VAR01-K. Motor for Blinds/Curtains.
PUL29-K. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30-K. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
Page 48

2 Kits (continuation)
KD9A. Heating Control Station Kit
Included Elements: 1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply .
MED76-K.Thermostat for Heating. 2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
MED77-K.Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration. 3.- Test with several temperatures.
SEL09-K. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac .(2
units).
TIM01-K. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
KD11A. Network analyzer Kit

Included Elements: 1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply.
MED11-K. AC Ammeter (0-10A). frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
MED25-K. Pointer Frequency Meter (45-65Hz). of a 220V single-phase circuit.
MED32-K. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V. 2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
MED21-K. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).
MED30-K. 1-Phase Phasemeter. 230V. frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
MED38-K. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V. of a 380V three-phase circuit.
MED12-K. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22-K. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31-K. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39-K. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33-K. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
4.- Electricity
MED63-K. Synchronoscope.
MED64-K. Phase Sequence Indicator.
KD13. Audio door entry system kit
Included Elements:
1.- Assembly of the system.
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR01-K. Phones Power Supply. 2.- To check the interphone operation.
POR02-K. Phone.
POR03-K. Interphone.
POR06-K. Lock.
KD14. Audio and video door entry system kit

Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the system.
POR06-K. Lock. 2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
POR05-K. Phone/Monitor.
POR04-K. Video Camera.
POR07-K. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
KD15A. Position control station kit

Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with sensors.
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
INT14-K. 1-pole 2 Switches.
SEL01-K. Light Signalling Beacons. 3.- Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
SEN04-K. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP. 4.- Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
SEN14-K. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor. sensor.
SEN29-K. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor. 5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
SEN01-K. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26-K. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
KD17A. Photoelectric control position station kit
Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the control station.
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
LAM04-K. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).
SEN18-K. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor. 3.- Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
SEN19-K. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor. 4.- Test of the detection with compact sensor.
SEN20-K. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN21-K. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter). 5.- Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
SEN22-K. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor). 6.- Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
SEN23-K. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN24-K. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor). 7.- Test with only emitters and receptors.
KD24. Position Switch kit
Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- MBB Micro-switch.
LAM03-K. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).
SEN01-K. Instantaneous Micro- switch. 3.- BBM Micro-switch.
SEN02-K. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03-K. BBM Micro-switch.

KD19A. Sound station kit
Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Mono-stereo system installation.
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Mono system with warnings reception.
AUD01-K. Analog Sound Regulator.
AUD04-K. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units). 3.- Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
AUD06-K. Basic Audio Central. 4.- Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
AUD20-K. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02-K. Digital Sound Regulator. 5.- Background Music installation.
AUD05-K. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03-K. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08-K. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10-K. Double Background Music Regulator.
KD22. Flooding control station kit

Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the flooding control.
DET03-K. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). 3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
DET04-K. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET11-K. Probe for Water Electro- valve (2 units).
4.- Electricity
SEL03-K. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21-K. Indoor Siren.
KD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF) Kit

Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
DET13-K. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14-K. Wireless Panic Push- button RF.
DET15-K. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01-K. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05-K. Bell + Buzzer.
KD25A. Kit of control station for domestic electric services through the telephone
Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Smoke detection.
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Gas detection and electro-valve control.
CTR01-K. Basic Control Element.
DET01-K. Flooding Detector. 3.- Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
DET03-K. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector) .
DET04-K. Flooding Detector (with probe). 4.- Temperature and Battery.
DET05-K. Gas Detector for domestic control . 5.- Intrusion detection.
DET06-K. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10-K. Water Electro-valve. 6.- Wireless detection.
DET12-K. Gas Electro-valve. 7.- Complete control of home electric services through the
DET13-K. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14-K. Wireless Panic Push- button RF. telephone.
DET15-K. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05-K. Tones Dialling Telephone.
KD28A. Kit of integral control station of domestic electric systems

Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the complete system with the smoke, flooding
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). and gas detectors.
CTR02-K. Advanced Control Element.
CTR05-K. Power Element 72W. 2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas detectors.
CTR07-K. Timers Element. 3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
CTR08-K. Inputs Element 24V.
CTR11-K. Outputs Element 24V. 4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and instrusion
CTR17-K. Infrared Remote Control for Control Elements. detectors.
CTR18-K. Infrared Receptor.
DET04-K. Flooding Detector (with probe). 5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion detectors.
DET05-K. Gas Detector for domestic control. 6.- Electro-valves activation.
DET06-K. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09-K. Intrusion Detector fo domestic control. 7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared control.
DET12-K. Gas Electro-valve.
VAR08-K. Monitor.
KD30. Gas control station kit

Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Gas detection.
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Electro-valve activation.
DET12-K. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03-K. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02-K. Gas Detector.
Page 50

Domestic Electric Installations (continuation)
KD31. Movement and sound detection and control kit
Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
1 INT15-K. 2 Switches with Light. 2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
LAM08-K. 2 Lamp-holders+ Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31-K. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10-K. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22-K 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05-K. Bell + Buzzer.
KD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits analyzer kit
Included Elements
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04-K. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc). 2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
MED04-K. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05-K. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08-K. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09-K. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15-K. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16-K. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
4.- Electricity
KD33. Installations faults simulator kit
Included Elements:
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
COM14-K. 2 Commutators. (2 units). 2.- Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
ENC09-K. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device (2 units). 3.- Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
COM21-K. Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators (2 units).
LAM01-K. Lamps. 4.- Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
LAM08-K. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W (2 units). 5.- Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
LAM09-K. Fluorescent Lamp. base.
MED65-K. Digital Multimeter. 6.- To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
FUS04-K. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Faults Box. 7.- To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 8.- To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/ELE-KITS.pdf 9.- To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electric Installations

KI1. Star-delta starter kit
Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the starter.
CON01-K.3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units). 2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
IAM20-K. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C. 3.- Measurement of the star current and delta current.
MED60-K. Network Analyzer.
PUL04-K. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac). 4.- Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting
REL02-K. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11-K. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.). current.
VAR02-K. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
KI2. Starter through auto-transformer kit

Included Elements:
CON01-K.3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units). 2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
IAM20-K. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60-K. Network Analyzer. 3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
PUL04-K. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL11-K. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14-K. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
KI3. Speed commutator for Dahlander motor kit

Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the commutator.
CON01-K.3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units). 2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a
IAM20-K. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C. Dahlander motor.
PUL04-K. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac). 3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
REL11-K. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03-K. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
KI4. Starter-inverter kit

Included Elements:
CON02-K.3-pole Contactor (220Vac). 2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
CON11-K.3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60-K. Network Analyzer. 3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
PUL03-K. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05-K. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
Industrial Electric Installations (continuation)
KI5. AC wound rotor motor starter kit
Included Elements:
ALI03-K. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
VAR06-K. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22-K. AC Starting Rheostat.
CON01-K.3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
KI6. DC motor starter kit

Included Elements:
1.- Direct starter.
2.- Starter rheostat.
ALI04-K. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04-K. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).
CAR23-K. DC Starting Rheostat.
CON03-K.3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
CAR20-K. Diodes and Thyristors.
4.- Electricity

KI7. Kit of automatic change of speed of a Dahlander motor with change of direction
Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set.
IAM24-K. 3-pole+neutral Magneto- thermal Automatic Switch, 2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
6A, Curve C. and consumption measurements.
CON01-K.3-pole Contactor (24Vac).(5 units). 3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
REL05-K. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units). speed.
PUL16-K. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units). 4.- Change to low speed.
PUL16-K. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units). 5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
VAR03-K. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor). 6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ measurements.
KI8. Kit of reactive power compensation (Power factor correction)

Included Elements:
1.- Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
ALI02-K. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
3.- Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
CAR04-K. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W. 4.- Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
CAR09-K. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF. 5.- Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
6.- Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
CAR12-K. Inductive Load 0-33-78- 140-193-236 mH (2 units). 7.- Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
MED60B-K.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters. 8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ compensation.
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/ELE-KITS.pdf 9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
KI9. Kit of people safety against indirect electrical contacts in TT neutral regimen
Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
CAR05-K. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W .
COM12-K.Commutator/Switch. 2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
PUL11-K. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac). switch.
TRA12-K. 3-Phase Current Transformer. 3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
AD13-K. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
KI10. Kit of people safety against indirect electrical contacts in TN neutral regimen
Included Elements:
COM12-K.Commutator/Switch. (2 units). 1.- Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
TRA12-K. 3-Phase Current Transformer. 2.- Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
IAD01-K. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 3.- Indirect contact with defect mass.
30mA, class A. 4.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
Resistance 200 W. TN-C conditions.
Resistance 100 W, 72W. 5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ TN-S conditions.
KI11. Kit of People safety against indirect electrical contacts on IT neutral regimen
Included Elements: SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
INT01-K. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units). 1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.
INT02-K. 2-pole Load Switch .(2 units). 2.- Study of an isolation double fault (only with one mass).
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF. (2 units)
Resistance 100 W. 3.- Study with several masses.
Resistance 10 W. 4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
CPA-K. Isolation Permanent Controller. 5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
Page 52

Energy Installations
KE1. Aerial line model kit
Included Elements:
CAR08-K.3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- Measurement of the voltage without loads.
CAR11-K.3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- Measurement of the voltage with loads.
CAR14-K.3-phase Inductive Load. 4.- Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
TRA05-K. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA. 5.- Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
CAR18-K.Aerial Line Model. Petersen coil.
TRA18-K. Petersen Coil.
KE2. Kit of reactive energy control and compensation

Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set with inductive load.
CAR08-K. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
CAR11-K. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j = 1.
CAR14-K. 3-phase Inductive Load. 4.- Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
KE3. Kit of test unit for magneto-thermal automatic switches

4.- Electricity
Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- To connect the set.
CAR04-K. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W. 2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
IAM13-K. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C. switch breaks.
TRA19-K. Transformer for Experiments (custom made). 3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
KE4. Kit of test unit for differential automatic switches

Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
IAD01-K. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A,
30mA, class A.
CAR04-K. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
KE5. Relay control station kit

Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- To connect the transformers to line.
REL23-K. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.
2.- To connect the protection relay.
CON01-K.3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
TRA10-K. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18-K. Aerial Line Model.
KE6. Energy counters control station kit

Included Elements:
1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
CAR01-K. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W .
TRA04-K. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. 2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
TRA10-K. Current Transformer 25/5A. counter.
MED72-K.Energy Counter.
KE7. Multi-functional electrical protection station kit

Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
CAR08-K. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11-K. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 2.- To simulate faults in the line.
CON01-K.3-pole Contactor (24Vac). 3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
REL22-K. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included). parameters.
TRA04-K. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. 4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
CAR14-K. 3-phase Inductive Load.
KE8. Kit of power & torque measurements of electrical motors

Included Elements:
ALI01-K. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
CON02-K.3-pole Contactor (220Vac). 2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
PUL11-K. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac). and the torque of the motor.
REL08-K. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents 0.3-1.5A). 3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
Energy Installations (continuation)
KE9. Kit of directional Relay: Earth fault detection. Directional power flow detection. Reactive power flow detection
Included Elements:
2.- Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
CAR08-K. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
3.- To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
CON01-K. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
4.- To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
CAR11-K. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
certain limit.
TRA04-K. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
REL20-K. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14-K. 3-phase Inductive Load.
Software
With no physical connection between Kit and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the Student/Kit
+
4.- Electricity
Software (K.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher knows at any
Kit moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students. These, on
(several elements)
the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the information
Instructor Student/Kit
Software Software on the subject of study.

- Print reports.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the kits, and working in network
K.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Kit

Software).
It explains how to use the kit, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each Kit has its own Student Software package.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory
has been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Available Student/Kits Software Packages:

!Domestic Electrical Installations: !Industrial Electrical Installations: !Energy Installations:
KD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm station. KD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic KI1/SOF. Star-delta starter. KE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
KD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station. electric services through the KI2/SOF. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o - KE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
transformer. compensation.
KD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs. telephone.
KI3/SOF. S p e e d c o m m u t a t o r f o r
KD6A/SOF. Luminosity control station. KD28A/SOF.Integral control station of Dahlander motor KE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
KD8/SOF. Blinds activator. domestic electric systems. KI4/SOF. Starter-inverter. automatic switches.
KD9A/SOF. Heating control station. KD30/SOF. Gas control station. KI5/SOF. AC wound rotor motor starter. KE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
KD31/SOF. Movement and sound KI6/SOF. DC motor starter. automatic switches.
KD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.
detection and control. KI7/SOF. Automatic change of speed KE5/SOF. Relay control station.
KD13/SOF. Audio door entry system. of a Dahlander motor with
KD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits KE6/SOF. Energy counters control
KD14/SOF. Audio and video door entry change of direction. station.
system. analyzer. KI8/SOF. Reactive power compensation KE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
KD15A/SOF. Position control station. KD33/SOF. Installations faults simulator. (Power factor correction).
protection station.
KD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control position KI9/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TT KE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
station. neutral regimen. of electrical motors.
KD24/SOF. Position Switch. KI10/SOF. People safety against indirect KE9/SOF. Directional Relay Earth fault
KD19A/SOF.Sound station. electrical contacts in TN detection. Directional power
KD22/SOF. Flooding control station. neutral regimen. flow detection. Reactive power
KI11/SOF. People safety against indirect flow detection.
KD23/SOF. Wireless basic control
electrical contacts in IT neutral
station (RF). regimen.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/ELE-KITS.pdf

Page 54
Data Acquisition
4 4 MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
MUAD is the perfect link between the kit and the PC. MUAD is a continuous data
Data acquisition
acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures, analyzes and
Cables to
1 interface software represents the parameters involved in the process.
2
(MUAD/SOF) MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
3 frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
Data acquisition
Connections
points We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the kit with the supplied
(DAB)
4
board
“n” Electric power Cable to cables (there are several connection points placed for it). The EPIB is connected to
Student the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Application (EPIB) post Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the student can get results from
the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.

1)Hardware :
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for their later
treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and right-hand part
corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
Analog Input Channels:
4.- Electricity
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second). EPIB
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.

Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2. DAB
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.

Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/ELE-KITS.pdf MUAD/SOF
See NEW UNITS of this Area in this link: www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=electricity&subarea=basic&lang=en
Page 55
EIV2. Home Automation Installations Trainer

Trainer designed for the study of automation electrical installations in home
and buildings. It allows the study of the security, the energy management,
the comfort, the communications, etc.
Frame with anodized aluminium structure, on which the modules of
domotic elements have to be fitted.
Modules allowing a quick, easy and secure installation of the domotic
elements , without having electric risks.
Use of the EIB ( european bus “ instabus”) installation system.
If foresees the use of a programmable logical controller, integrable on the
EIB bus.
Connection between the different modules through some connections
ready for such purpose.
Programming software for the programmable logical controller, and
instabus.
Modules included:
Power supply module, coil and data interface.
Lamp-holder module. (2 units).
Binary entry module.
Binary output module.
Switch-pushbutton module.
Dimmer module.
Module: thermostat, quadruple push-button and presence detector.
(Multifunction module).
Logical module and scenes.
Blind module.
Tactile vision module.
Telecontrol module.
Programmable logical controller module and EIB module.
Double push-button module, infrared detector and display/actuator.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
Manuals:
This unit is supplied with several manuals: Required Services, Assembly
and Installation, Starting-up, Safety, Maintenance & Practices Manuals.
4.- Electricity

catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/EIV2.pdf
EIV6. Home Automation Installations Trainer

Trainer designed for the study of automation electrical installations in home
and buildings. It allows the study of the security, the energy management,
the comfort, the communications, etc.
Frame with anodized aluminium structure, on which the modules of
domotic elements have to be fitted.
Modules allowing a quick, easy and secure installation of the domotic
elements, without electric risks.
Use of the EIB ( european bus “instabus”) installation system.
Connection between the different modules through connections ready for
such purpose.
Modules included:
Power supply module, coil and data interface.
Lamp-holder module. (2 units).
Binary entry module.
Binary output module.
Switch-pushbutton module.
Dimmer module.
Module: thermostat, quadruple push-button and presence detector.
(Multifunction module).
Logical module and scenes.
Manuals:
This unit is supplied with several manuals: Required Services, Assembly
and Installation, Starting-up, Safety, Maintenance & Practices Manuals.
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/EIV6.pdf
4.2- Electricity Demonstration
PDL. Lamps Demonstration PDCE-P. Electric Cables PDCE-S. Electric Cables PDF. Fuses
Panel Demonstration Panel Demonstration Panel Demonstration Panel
(Power) (Signalling)
4.3- Electrical Installations Workshop
Page 56
4.4- Electrical Machines
LIMEL. Integrated Laboratory for Electrical Machines:
1 Common Electrical Machines Base Units:
EME. Electrical Machines Unit EME/M. Electrical Machines Unit EME/B. Electrical Machines Unit
(Advanced option) (Intermediate option) (Basic option)
2 Measurement Units 6 Transformers:
4.- Electricity
Other Network Analyzers: ETT. Three and Single Individual elements:
Digital Multimeter -EALD. With Computer Phase Transformers
Data Acquisition + Unit -AUTR. Variable Auto-
Oscilloscope (PC). transformer.
EAL. Network Analyzer -EALDG.With Computer -TRANS. Single-phase
Unit Data Acquisition + or transformer.
Oscilloscope (PC)+ 11 MUAD. Power Data Acquisition -TRANS/3.Three-phase
Oscilloscope System transformer.
Display.
-EAM-VA. Analog
Measurement Unit Teaching 7 DC Motor Speed Control
-MUAD. Power Data Technique
Acquisition System used VVCC. DC Motors - VVCC/M. DC Motor
Speed Controller Speed
3 Loads: Controller
Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) (intermediate
option)
RCL3R. Resistive, or Individual elements:
Inductive and Capacitive
Loads Module Individual elements: - VVCC/B. DC motors
-IND. Inductance. speed controller,
Data Acquisition Board (DAB) with no other
or -CON. Box of condensers. elements
-REV. Variable resistance.
-REF. Fixed resistance. 8 AC Motor Speed Control
Data Acquisition - VVCA/M. AC Motor
VVCA. AC Motors
Software(MUAD/SOF) Speed Controller Speed
Controller
or (intermediate
option)
4 Motors: Individual elements:
12 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction - VVCA/B. AC motors
Software System speed controller,
with no other
elements
Teaching
Technique
used 9 PLC
PLC-PI. PLC Module
for the Control of
INS/SOF. Instructor Software Industrial Processes
Individual elements:
+ or - EDIBON FP-X-CPU. PLC,
with no other elements.
5 Brakes:
FRE-FE. Electronic Brake Other brakes:
-DI-FRE. Pendular Dynamo EMT../SOF.
Brake. Student/Motor Software 10 Tachogenerator
-FREND. Dynamo Brake. TECNEL/T.
or
-FRENP. Magnetic Powder Tachogenerator
Brake. or - TECNEL/TM. Hand
-FREPR. Prony Brake. Tachometer
-FRECP. Eddy Current
Brake
Complete configuration
Main units: Complementary possibilities: Complementary elements:
1 Common Electrical Machines Base Units. 11 MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System. 6 Transformers.
2 Measurement Units. 12 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software 7 DC Motor Speed Control.
3 Loads. System. 8 AC Motor Speed Control.
4 9 PLC (Programmable Logic Contoller).
Motors.
5 10
Brakes. * MINIMUM CONFIGURATION: 1 + 2 Tachogenerator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/machines/LIMEL.pdf

4.4- Electrical Machines (continuation)
LIMEL. Integrated Laboratory for Electrical Machines: (continuation)
1 Common Electrical Machines Base Units:

EDIBON presents three alternatives with increasing complexity and practical possibilities.
- EME. Electrical Machines Unit. It is a compact unit including the main electrical functions. It is EDIBON’s most advanced option.
- EME/M. Electrical Machines Unit (intermediate option). Students can get a good grasp on the subject.
- EME/B. Electrical Machines Unit (basic option). It includes the most basic functions.
EME. Electrical Machines Unit (advanced option)

The Electrical Machines Unit (EME) is a compact and The D.C.Machine (with motors EMT 1/2/3/4/5/15)
robust box for the study of the main electrical functions. In 1.- Preparation, regulation and inversion in a
its front side, you find standard electrical functions, divided dynamo with independent excitation.
in sections, for a better visualization of the different 2.- The dynamo characteristic curve without load.
applications. In EME, you have all the main panels you 3.- Dynamos with series and shunt excitation.
need for analyzing an electrical machine, as measuring 4.- Dynamo external characteristic curve.
devices, supply systems, management systems, protection 5.- Dynamo characteristic regulation curve.
systems, synchronism and rectification systems, etc. 6.- Speed variation, inversion and stop of D.C. motor
This unit is prepared for working to a maximum power of 1 with independent excitation.
KW and all the components are located within a compact 7.- Speed-armature current characteristic curves in a
box. D.C. motor with shunt or independent excitation.
8.- Torque-current characteristic curve in a D.C.
Metallic box. motor with shunt or independent excitation.
Diagram in the front panel. 9.- Torque-speed characteristic curve in a D.C. motor
with shunt or independent excitation.
Different modules included in the EME unit: 10.- Speed-excitation current characteristic curves in a
4.- Electricity
-Connection terminals module:

D.C. motor with independent or shunt excitation.
Operation in constant power.
Connection terminals of three-phase: R, S and T and 11.- Speed control at constant torque.
supply neutral with the corresponding signaling 12.- Series D.C. motor: starting, speed variation,
lamps which indicate the voltage. inversion and braking.
13.- Speed-intensity characteristic curve in a D.C.
There are 4 terminals in each phase. motor with series excitation.
Signaling lamp which will light up when the three- 14.- Torque-current characteristic curve in a D.C.
phase sequence in correct. motor with series excitation.
15.- The D.C. motor with series excitation as universal
This module also has a signaling lamp and fuse, motor.
corresponding to the internal supply of the unit. The Synchronous Machine (with motor EMT 6)
-Operation module: 16.- Starting, voltage and frequency regulation in a
three-phase alternator.
3 Running switches. 17.- Net coupling of a three-phase alternator.
3 Stop switches. 18.- Characteristic curve of an alternator without load.
19.- Characteristic curve of an alternator in short
3 Three-pole contactors, power A, B and C, with circuit.
control circuit in alternating current. Each contactor 20.- Characteristic curve of an alternator with load.
has 2 auxiliary terminals (NC) and 3 auxiliary 21.- Synchronous motor starting.
terminals (NO). The Asynchronous Machine (with motors EMT 7/ 8/ 9/
3 Lamps that will light when the contactors are started. 10/ 11/ 16/ 17).
22.- Morley diagrams.
2 Timing realys. 23.- Starting process of a three-phase asynchronous
Indicating lamps. motor with rotor in short circuit.
24.- Test without load of an asynchronous motor with
-Protection module: rotor in short circuit.
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker. 25.- Test with load of a three-phase asynchronous
motor with rotor in short circuit.
Thermal relay. 26.- Starting of a three-phase asynchronous motor
with the wound rotor.
3 Power contacts. 27.- Test without load of a three-phase asynchronous
2 auxiliary contacts (NO and NC). motor with the wound rotor.
28.- Test with load of a three-phase asynchronous
Signaling lamp. motor with wound rotor.
-Synchronizing and rectification module: 29.- Starting and turn sense inversion of a single-phase
motor with capacitor.
3 lamps, as well as the inlet terminals for the three- 30.- Test without load of a single-phase asynchronous
phases with signaling for indicating its correct motor.
sequence. 31.- Test in load of the single-phase motor.
One phase bridge rectifier, with 2 fuses with their The Universal motor (with motor EMT 12)
corresponding fusion lamps. 32.- The Universal motor with D.C. supply.
33.- Speed-current characteristic of an Universal
-Contactors module: motor with D.C. supply.
3 Power takes, and the selected position closes the 34.- Torque-intensity characteristic in the D.C.
corresponding contact in the three phases. Universal motor.
35.- The universal motor eith A.C. supply.
-Possibility of assemblies of control circuits with delay. The Repulsion motor (with motor EMT 14)
* Minimum recommended measurement units: 36.- Starting and inversion of a single-phase repulsion
motor.
2 Digital multimeters. 37.- Test of a single-phase repulsion motor without
Recommended measurement units: load.
38.- Test of a single-phase asynchronous repulsion
EAL. Network Analyzer Unit. motor in A.C.
Electrical supply: Three-phase with neutral and ground, The Brushless motor (with motor EMT 18)
380V. 39.- Brushless motor starting.
40.- Speed control and change of the turn sense.
Dimensions: 490 x 450 x 470 mm. approx. The Dahlander motor (with motor EMT 9)
Weight: 50 Kg. approx. 41.- Dahlander motor starting.
42.- Different working speeds.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 43.- Changing the different speeds of Dahlander
catalogues/en/units/electricity/machines/LIMEL.pdf motor while working.
The Stepper motor (with motor EMT 19)
44.- Stepper motor starting.
45.- Steps control.
46.- Rotation sense change.
The Reluctance motor ( with motor EMT21)
47.- Star connection of the reluctance motor.
48.- Delta connection of the reluctance motor.
49.- Revolution sense and inversion of rotation.
Page 58
1 Common Electrical Machines Base Units: (continuation)
EME/M. Electrical Machines Unit (intermediate option)

Metallic box. The D.C.Machine:
Diagram in the front panel. 1.- Preparation, regulation and inversion in
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker. a dynamo with independent excitation.
2.- The dynamo characteristic curve without
Two double switches (1 NO + 1 NC in each one) load.
Push Button (1 NC + 1 NO). 3.- Dynamos with series and shunt
excitation.
Three contactors with 2 NO and 1 NC. 4.- Dynamo external characteristics curve.
DC supply 200 V dc with fuses. 5.- Characteristic regulation curve of a
dynamo.
Connection Key 6.- Speed control at constant torque.
Emergency stop push button. 7.- Series D.C. motor: starting, speed
* Minimum recommended measurement units: (see Section “2”) variation, inversion and braking.
The Synchronous Machine:
2 Digital multimeters. 8.- Starting, voltage and frequency
Recommended measurement units: (see Section “2”) regulation in a three-phase alternator.
9.- Characteristic curve of an alternator
EAL. Network Analyzer Unit. without load.
Electrical supply: Three-phase with neutral and ground, 380V. 10.- Characteristic curve of an alternator in
Dimensions: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx.
short circuit.
11.- Characteristic curve of an alternator with
Weight: 25 Kg. approx. load.
12.- Synchronous motor starting.
4.- Electricity
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ The Asynchronous Machine:
catalogues/en/units/electricity/machines/LIMEL.pdf 13.- Morley diagrams.
14.- Starting process of a three-phase
asynchronous motor with rotor in short
circuit.
15.- Test without load of an asynchronous
motor with rotor in short circuit.
16.- Test with load of a three-phase
asynchronous motor with rotor in short
circuit.
17.- Starting and turn sense inversion of a
single-phase motor with capacitor.
18.- Test without load of a single-phase
motor.
19.- Test in load of the single-phase motor.
The Universal motor:
20.- The universal motor with D.C. supply.
21.- Speed-current characteristic of an
Universal motor with D.C. supply.
22.- Torque-intensity characteristic in the
D.C. Universal motor.
23.- The Universal motor eith A.C. supply.
The Repulsion motor:
24.- Starting and inversion of a single-phase
repulsion motor.
25.- Test of a single-phase repulsion motor
without load.
26.- Test of a single-phase asynchronous
repulsion motor in A.C.
The Brushless motor:
27.- Brushless motor starting.
28.- Speed control and change of the turn
sense.
The Dahlander motor:
29.- Dahlander motor starting.
30.- Different working speeds.
The Reluctance motor:
31.- Star connection of the reluctance motor.
32.- Delta connection of the reluctance
motor.
33.- Revolution sense and inversion of
rotation.
EME/B. Electrical Machines Unit (basic option)

Metallic box.
The D.C.Machine:
Diagram in the front panel. 1.- Preparation, regulation and
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker. inversion in a dynamo with
DC supply 200 V dc with fuses. independent excitation.
Connection Key. 2.- Dynamos with series and shunt
excitation.
Emergency stop push button. 3.- Speed control at constant torque.
Two push buttons (1NO + 1NC). 4.- Series D.C. Motor: starting,
* Minimum recommended measurement units: speed variation, inversion and
2 Digital multimeters. braking.
The Asynchronous Machine:
Recommended measurement units: 5.- Starting process of a three-phase
EAL. Network Analyzer Unit. asynchronous motor with rotor in
Electrical supply: Three-phase with neutral and ground, 380V. short circuit.
Dimensions: 300 x 180 x 120 mm. approx. 6.- Test without load of an
asynchronous motor with rotor in
Weight: 5 Kg. approx. short circuit.
The Universal motor:
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ 7.- The Universal motor with D.C.
units/electricity/machines/LIMEL.pdf supply.
2 Measurement Units
The measurement units let us extract information from the experimental unit (EME), thus allowing further process of the data. We can get values of currents, voltages, resistance,
etc. for further analysis.
MULT. Digital Multimeter

Digital multimeter.
Voltage and current meter.
Resistances and capacitors.

units/electricity/machines/LIMEL.pdf
EAL. Network Analyzer Unit

This unit shows the main electric parameters on the electric network through
the interface and an parameter selection.
4.- Electricity
Metallic box.
3 current inputs, for series intensity.
3 voltage terminals, for each phase measure (R,S,T) and another one for the
neutral connection.
Control and visualization digital display.
Voltage: Range 20 - 500 Vrms. Prec.: ± 0.5%. Phase to phase - Phase
to neutral.
Current: Range 0.02 - 5 Arms. Prec.: ± 0.5%.
Frequency: Range 48 to 62 Hz. ± 0.1Hz.
Power: Active, Reactive and Apparent. Range 0.01 to 9900 kW.
Prec.: ±1%.
Power Factor: Power Factor for each phase and average. Range -0.1 to +
0.1. Prec.: ±1%.
Operating temperature 0 to +50°C.
Power supply: 220 V. - 110 V., single -phase + ground.
Dimensions: 300 x 180 x 120 mm. approx. Weight: 3 Kg. approx.
EALD. Network Analyzer Unit, with Computer Data Acquisition + Oscilloscope (PC).

Metallic box.
3 voltage terminals for each phase measure (R,S,T) and another one for the
neutral connection.
Control and visualization digital display.
to neutral.
Current: Range 0.02 - 5 Arms. Prec.: ±0.5%.
Prec.: ±1%.
0.1. Prec.: ±1%.
Connection RS232 to computer (PC).
Data Acquisition Software.
Page 60
2 Measurement Units (continuation)
EALDG. Network Analyzer Unit, with Computer Data Acquisition + Oscilloscope (PC) + Oscilloscope Display

Steel box. Diagram in the front panel.
3 voltage terminals for each phase measure (R,S,T) and another one for the
neutral connection.
Control and visualization digital display and oscilloscope display.
to neutral.
Current: Range 0.02 - 5 Arms. Prec.: ± 0.5%.
Prec.: ±1%.
0.1. Prec.: ±1%.
4.- Electricity
Connection RS232 to computer (PC).
Data Acquisition Software.
EAM-VA. Analog Measurement Unit

This unit allows to analyze the different voltages and currents involved in a
circuit through a simple frontal panel that includes analog measurement
instruments.
Metallic box.
4 Voltmeters.
- A.C. Measuring Instruments with moving iron.
- Voltmeter with measuring range from 0 to 500Vac.
- Horizontal scale with precision grade of 1.5 (following norm
BS89/IEC51).
2 Ammeters.
- A.C. Measuring Instruments with moving iron.
- Ammeter with measuring range of 0 to 5A.
- Horizontal scale with precision grade of 1.5 (following norm
BS89/IEC51).
2 Analog inputs for each meter.
MUAD. Power Data Acquisiton System. (see page 68)

Loads: 3
RLC3R. Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Loads Module
When you brake an electrical machine, the electrical energy has to be
dissipated. Loads provide this function, the dissipation of energy. Depending
on the experiment, the dissipating load has to be resistive, inductive or
capacitive. EDIBON recommends having the three kinds, if a good
understanding on the subject is pursued.
Our Resistive, Capacitive and Inductive Loads Module (RCL3R) offers:
Single and Three-phase resistances.
Single and Three-phase inductances.
Single and Three-phase capacitors.
Metallic box. Diagram in the front panel.
Variable resistive loads: 3 x [ 150 W (500 W) ].
Fixed resistive loads: 3 x [ 150 W (500 W) + 150 W (500 W) ].
Inductive loads: 3 x [ 0, 33, 78, 140, 193, 236 mH ].(230V /2 A)
Capacitive loads: 3 x [ 4 x 7 mF ]. (400V)
Individual Elements SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

When a simpler and cheaper option is preferred when studying the use of
loads in electrical machines, EDIBON gives the choice of acquiring single
components. They are offered as single independent components to be
4.- Electricity
mounted by the student.

-IND. Inductance: From 33 to 236 mH, or similar.
-CON. Box of Condensers: 7µF or similar.
IND CON REV -REV. Variable Resistance: 0-150Ù (500W), or similar.
-REF. Fixed Resistance : 150Ù (500W), or similar.
REF units/electricity/machines/LIMEL.pdf
4 Motors
EDIBON has a wide range of electric motors. The motors supplied include connectors, couplings, standard motor support, etc.
Available Motors
EMT2 EMT1. D.C. Independent excitation The D.C.Machine (with motors EMT 1/ 2/ 26.-Starting of a three-phase
motor-generator. 3/4/5/15) asynchronous motor with the
1.-Preparation,regulationandinversionin woundrotor.
EMT2. D.C. Series excitation adynamowithindependentexcitation. 27.-Test without load of a three-phase
motor-generator. 2.-Thedynamocharacteristiccurvewithout asynchronous motor with the
EMT3 EMT3. D.C. Shunt excitation load. woundrotor.
EMT1 3.-Dynamos with series and shunt 28.-Test with load of a three-phase
motor-generator. excitation. asynchronous motor with wound
EMT4. D.C. Compound excitation 4.-Dynamoexternalcharacteristiccurve. rotor.
motor-generator. 5.-Dynamo characteristic regulation 29.-Starting and turn sense inversion of
EMT5 curve. a single-phase motor with
EMT5. D . C . S h u n t - s e r i e s
6.-Speed variation, inversion and stop of capacitor.
compound excitation motor. D.C. motor with independent 30.-Test without load of a single-phase
EMT6. A . C . S y n c h r o n o u s excitation. motor.
alternator motor. 7.-Speed-armature current characteristic 31.-Test in load of the single-phase
curve in a D.C. motor with shunt or motor.
EMT7. Asynchronous three-phase independentexcitation. The Universal motor (with motor EMT
EMT4 EMT6 motor of squirrel cage. 12)
8.-Torque-current characteristic curve in
EMT8. Asynchronous three-phase a D.C. Motor with shunt or 32.-The universal motor with D.C.
motor with wound rotor. independentexcitation. Supply.
9.-Torque-speed characteristic curve in a 33.-Speed-current characteristic of an
EMT8 EMT9. Dahlander three-phase D.C. Motor with shunt or independent UniversalmotorwithD.C.Supply.
(two-speeds). excitation. 34.-Torque-intensity characteristic in
EMT10. Asynchronouts three-phase 10.-Speed-excitation current characteristic theD.C.Universalmotor.
motor of two independent curve in a D.C. Motor with independent 35.-The universal motor eith A.C.
or shunt excitation. Operation in Supply.
speeds. constantpower. The repulsion motor (with motor EMT
EMT7 EMT9 EMT11. Asynchronous single-phase 11.-Speedcontrolatconstanttorque. 14)
motor with starting 12.-Series D.C. Motor: starting, speed 36.-Starting and inversion of a single-
capacitor. variation,inversionandbraking. phaserepulsionmotor.
13.-Speed-intensity characteristic curve 37.-Test of a single-phase repulsion
EMT12. Universal motor (single- inaD.C.Motorwithseriesexcitation. withoutload.
EMT11 phase). 14.-Torque-current characteristic curve 3 8 . -Te s t o f a s i n g l e - p h a s e
EMT14. Repulsion motor, single- inaD.C.Motorwithseriesexcitation. asynchronous repulsion motor
phase with short-circuited 15.-The D.C. Motor with series excitation withA.C.
brushes. asuniversalmotor. The Brushless motor (with motor EMT
The Synchronous Machine (with motor 18)
EMT12 EMT15. D.C. Permanent magnet EMT6) 39.-Brushlessmotorstarting.
EMT10 motor. 16.-Starting, voltage and frequency 40.-Speed control and change of the
EMT16. Asynchronous single-phase regulation in a three-phase turnsense.
alternator. The Dahlander motor (with motor EMT
motor with starting and 17.-Net coupling of a three-phase 9)
EMT15 running capacitor. alternator. 41.-Dahlandermotorstarting.
EMT17. Three-phase motor of 18.-Characteristic curve of an alternator 42.-Differentworkingspeeds.
squirel c a g e w i t h “ Y ” withoutload. 43.-Changing the different speeds of
connection. 19.-Characteristic curve of an alternator Dahlandermotorwhileworking.
inshortcircuit. TheSteppermotor(withmotorEMT19)
EMT18. D.C. Brushless motor. 20.-Characteristic curve of an alternator 44.-Steppermotorstarting.
EMT16
EMT19. Stepper motor. withload. 45.-Stepscontrol.
EMT14
21.-Synchronousmotorstarting. 46.-Rotationsensechange.
EMT20. Asynchronous single-phase The asynchronous Machine (with motors The Reluctance motor (with motor
motor with split phase. EMT7/8/9/10/11/16/17) EMT21)
EMT19 EMT21. Three-phase Reluctance 22.-Morleydiagrams. 47.-Star connection of the reluctance
motor. 23.-Starting process of a three-phase motor.
asynchronous motor with rotor in 48.-Delta connection of the reluctance
EMT22. Single-phase Shaded Pole shortcircuit. motor.
motor. 24.-Test without load of an asynchronous 49.-Revolution sense and inversion of
motorwithrotorinshortcircuit. rotation.
More information in: 25.-Test with load of a three-phase
EMT20 www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
EMT17 asynchronous motor with rotor in
en/units/electricity/machines/ shortcircuit.
LIMEL.pdf
Page 62

5 Brakes
The importance of Brakes comes when we want to adjust the motor speed, measure the torque given, or stop the motor.
FRE-FE. Electronic Brake

This unit is based in two elements:
1.- Module -metallic box:
Power supply:1 phase, 200-240V.
Rated output capacity:0.75 KW.
Output frequency range: 0.2 to 400 Hz.
Display to visualize voltage (V), Current (A), and Frequency (Hz).
Brake resistance included.
Torquemeter.
R.p.m. Meter.
Connectors.
2.- Braking motor mounted on a bench-support.
Connection wire between elements “1” and “2”.
Electrical supply: 220V a.c. - 110V a.c., single-phase + ground.
DI-FRE. Pendular Dynamo Brake

Power: 250-300W.
V.Excitation: 190 V.D.C. I.Excitation nominal: 0.3A.
4.- Electricity
V.Armature: 200 V.D.C. I.Armature nominal: 1.5A.
Torque measured with lever and weights, by combining the mechanical
torque and electrical torque.
Security connectors.
Bench-support.
Electrical supply: 200 Vdc.
FREND. Dynamo Brake
Power: 250-300W.
V.Excitation: 190 V.D.C. I.Excitation nominal: 0.3A.
V.Armature: 200 V.D.C. I.Armature nominal: 1.5A.
Connectors.
Bench - support.
Electrical supply: 200 Vdc.
FRENP. Magnetic Powder Brake

The unit consists of a magnetic powder brake, a control module an a
tachometer for the speed measurement.
The control module allows setting the nominal torque of the brake through a
potentiometer. It has two terminals to measure a voltage in direct proportion
to the current supplied to the brake, therefore, to the exerted torque.
The unit has a tachometer connected to its axis.
The unit also includes a fuse and a thermal relay to avoid eventual damages.
Max. power: 400 W, limited at 220W. Voltage: 24 Vac. Max. torque: 5 Nm.
Max. R.P.M.: 3000.
It is equipped with temperature probe to stop the braking action.
Electrical supply: 220 Vac. - 110 Vac.

FREPR. Prony Brake

Prony brake with resistant ribbon. Mechanical braking action and
dynamometer.
Max. Power: 500 W.
Max. Torque: 4Nm.
Max. R.P.M.: 3000.
Max. Time: 30 seconds.
FRECP. Eddy Current Brake

Max. Power: 500 W. Voltage: 120 Vdc. Max. Torque: 3Nm. Max. R.P. M.:
3000.
6 Transformers
ETT. Three-phase and Single-phase Transformers Unit

Metallic box. Diagram in the front panel. 1.- Measurement of the transformation
Single-phase transformer: Ratio.
Nominal power: 500 VA. Transformation ratio: 400 / 230 V.
2.- Rehearsal of a single-phase transformer
Inlets: 400 V and 230 V (in the primary). Number of secondary coils: 2.
in open circuit.
Output voltage in the secondary: 115 (each one).
Maximum current in the primary: 1.5 A (for each voltage of 400 V). 3 A (for 3.- Rehearsal of a single-phase transformer
each voltage of 230 V). in short circuit.
Three-phase transformer in pillars: 4.- Rehearsal of a single-phase transformer
Nominal power: 1000 VA. Transformation ratio: 380/3 x 127 V. in load.
Inlets: 220 V and 380 V (in the primary). 5.- Rehearsal of a three-phase transformer
Outlet voltage in the secondary: 3 x 127 V (each phase). in open circuit.
Maximum current in the primary: 2 A (for a voltage of 380 V). 2 A (for
6.- Rehearsal of a three-phase transformer
a voltage of 220 V).
Connection modes: Primary: Star, triangle / Secondary: Star, triangle, zig- in short circuit.
zag, six-phase and triple star. 7.- Autotransformer tests.
Electrical supply: 8.- Connection modes tests:
For Single-phase transformer: 400-230 V / 50 Hz. or 60 Hz. Start/delta/Zig-Zag/6-phase/triple
For Three-phase transformer: 380-220 V / 50 Hz. or 60 Hz. star.
Dimensions: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 40 Kg. approx. 9.- Transformer ratio variation tests.
4.- Electricity

TPPT. Three-phase Power Transformer Unit

The “TPPT” unit is formed by a steel box, which contains a three-phase power
transformer. In the front panel of the box are located the terminals for both
primary and secondary terminals for different power supply inputs and
outputs. In the backside are located the fuses to protect the transformer.
Power: 1000 VA.
Module 1: Primary winding
It includes a three-phase winding which can be connected externally in
either star or triangle, each phase winding has a neutral terminal, a 146V
a.c. intermediate terminal and 220V a.c. terminal.
Module 2: Secondary winding
It includes a three-phase winding which can be connected externally in
either star of triangle. Each phase winding has a neutral terminal, a 127V
a.c. intermediate terminal and a 220V a.c. terminal.
This unit can be used to make 6 different a.c. connection types:
-Star (380V). - Triangle (380V). -Triangle (220V). - Triangle (380V).
-Star (380V). - Star (220V). -Triangle (220V). - Star (220V).
-Star (380V). - Triangle (127V). -Triangle (220V). - Triangle (127V).
Electrical supply: 380-220 V.
EMPTA. Auxiliary Transformer and Protection Module

Metallic Box. Diagram in the front panel. 1.- Conversion from 127V/60Hz to 220V/
Input and output connectors.
Thermal magnetic unit 16 A ., 2 poles. Differential 25 A., 30 mV., 230 V. 50Hz.
Reversible auto-transformer 125-220 (1000 VA). 2.- Conversion from 220V/50Hz to 127V/
Conversion from 127V. 60Hz to 220V. 50Hz. 60Hz.
Conversion from 220V. 50Hz to 127V. 60Hz.
3.- Differential electrical protection.
Differential electrical protection. Thermal magnetic protection.
Required services: Input: 220V. 50Hz or 127V. 60Hz. 4.- Thermal magnetic protection.
Electrical supply: 220 V a.c. - 127 V a.c.
Dimensions: 300 x 120 x 190 mm. approx. Net weight: 3Kg. approx.
Individual Elements:
- AUTR. Variable Auto-transformer.
- TRANS. Single-phase transformer.
Single phase transformer, 400 Vac/230 Vac, 400 VA.
Ground connector.
- TRANS/3.Three-phase transformer.
Three phase transformer, 400 Vac/230 Vac, 1000 VA
TRANS
TRANS/3 units/electricity/machines/LIMEL.pdf
Page 64
7 DC Motor Speed Control
VVCC. DC Motor Speed Controller
This unit varies the speed of a DC motor for control applications. It works with
1.- Motor parameters adjustment.
any DC motor available.
2.- Working at a certain frequency.
Metallic box.
Front panel including: 3.- Starting carrying out by defined ramp.
Excitation connection (2 connectors). 4.- Braking possibility until a certain
Rotor connection (2 connectors). speed and recovery.
Tachodynamo connection (2 connectors).
Parameters self adjustment (torque control and speed control):
Motor torque regulator.
Motor speed regulator.
State leds indicators.
START/STOP speed controller switch.
ON/OFF main switch.
Maximum power: 550W.
4.- Electricity
Maximum torque: 2.6 Nm
Speed range: 130-2000 r.p.m.
Besides the motor speed controller, all the indicators, connecting cables and
additional components are included.
Electrical supply: 220V a.c. - 110V ac., single-phase + ground.

VVCC/M. DC Motor Speed Controller (intermediate option)
This unit consists in a variable transformer followed by a rectifier bridge and

an anti-ripple capacitor with a resistor to get discharged.
Metallic box.
Regulated voltage output up to ~320 Vdc.
Maximum current output 2 A.
Front panel including:
Connections:
Positive, negative and ground connections.
ON/OFF switch.
The top side of the unit include a wheel to adjust the DC output voltage up
to ~320 Vdc.
Electrical supply: 220V a.c. - 110V ac., single-phase + ground.

Individual Elements:

-VVCC/B. DC motors speed controller, with no other elements.
Maximum power: 550W.
Maximum torque: 2.6 N.m.

8 AC Motor Speed Control
VVCA. AC Motor Speed Controller

This is a unit for varying the speed of an AC motor for control applications. It
1.- Motor parameters adjustment.
works with any AC motor available.
This unit enables to change the speed of an asynchronous motor, obtaining 2.- Working at a frequency given by the
features which characterize a direct current motor. It consists basically on a panel.
rectifying phase coupled to another inverter phase, with a capacitor in
parallel between them. By varying the shooting frequency of the IGBT, we 3.- Working at a frequency given by an
obtain an alternating output at a variable frequency which is applied to the analog input (potentiometer).
asynchronous motor.
4.- Turn inversion.
Metallic box. Circuit diagram in front panel.
It has a control panel in order to introduce the parameters of the motor that 5.- Display of analog output.
is going to be used and the output frequency. In addition, through it, we can
carry out several programming. It also has a series of terminals where we 6.- Digital inputs configuration.
connect the digital and analog inputs and the relay and transistor outputs.
7.- Outputs from alarm to relay.
Maximum power: 750 W. Parameter self adjustment. Analog/digital
parameter inlets through panel. Turn inversion while running. 8.- Outputs from alarm to transistor.
4.- Electricity
Analog parameter visualization.

Voltage Input : Frequency set according to external command: up to
50Hz. Reversible operation using +/- signal: 0 to +/-10 V. PID control.
Current input: Frequency set according to the analog input current
command: up to 50 Hz. Reversible operation: 20 to 4mA. PID control.
5 Digital inputs that can be configured by the user. 1 outlet to alarm relay. 2
transistor internal outlets. Maximum load current: 50 mA. Leak current at
OFF: 0.1 mA.
Speed range: 130-2000 r.p.m.
Besides the motor speed controller, all the indicators, connecting cables and
additional components are included.
Electrical supply: 220 V a.c. - 110 V a.c., single-phase + ground.
Dimensions: 600 x 600 x 150 mm. approx. Weight: 30 kg. approx.

VVCA/M. AC Motor Speed Controller (intermediate option)

This unit consist in a simple AC motor speed controller.
Metallic box.
Output: 3 PH, 3.0 KVA, 220 V, 1-50 Hz., 8.0 A.
Overload current thermal protection.
ON/OFF switch.
It has two blocks in the front panel:
Speed control:
Start/Stop switch.
Speed control potenciometer.
Connections to motor:
Three-phase connection to AC motor.
Ground connection.
Electrical supply: 220 V a.c. - 110 V a.c., single-phase + ground.

Individual Elemenents:
-VVCA/B. AC motors speed controller, with no other elements.

Frequency from 0 to 60Hz.

Page 66
9 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)
The Programmable Logic Controller is a device designed for real time control of sequential processes in an industrial environment. In this case, EDIBON has developed this PLC
module for controlling the Electrical Machines Unit “EME”.
PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes

This module has been designed for the Control of Industrial Processes. The 1.- Control of the particular unit process
application has been developed to be used with any individual electric through the control interface box
machine. without the PC.
PLC-PI. Unit: 2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors values
Metallic box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. used in the particular unit process.
Front panel: 4.- Calibration of all sensors included in
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block: the particular unit process.
16 Digital inputs. 5.- Hand on of all the actuators involved
14 Digital outputs. in the particular unit process.
Analog inputs block: 6.- Realization of different experiments,
PLC-PI 16 Analog inputs. in automatic way, without having in
front the particular unit. (This
Analog outputs block: experiment can be decided
4 Analog outputs. previously).
Touch screen. 7.- Simulation of outside actions, when
+ Back panel:
Power supply connector. 2 A Fuse. RS-232 connector to PC.
there are not any hardware element
present.
8.- PLC hardware general use and
4.- Electricity
Inside:
manipulation.
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable. 9.- PLC process application for the
Panasonic PLC: particular unit.
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec. for a basic instruction. 10.- PLC structure.
Program capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. 11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
Equipped with a USB communication port. configuration.
High-speed counter. 12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
Multi-point PID control. 13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming standard
PLC-SOF Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
languages (ladder diagram (LD),
RS232 Communication wire, to computer (PC). structures text (ST), instructions list
(IL), sequential function chart (SFC),
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software: function diagram (FBD).
The software package is always included with the PLC-PI unit, since it is 15.- New configuration and development
the necessary application to program the PLC-PI from the computer. of new process.
Electrical supply single-phase, 220 V. - 110 V. 16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- Visualization of results and
comparisons with the particular unit
process.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ 18.- Possibility if creating new process in
units/electricity/machines/LIMEL.pdf relation with the particular unit
process.
19.- PLC Programming exercises.
20.- O w n P L C a p p l i c a t i o n s i n
accordance with teacher and student
requirements.
EDIBON FP-X/CPU. PLC, with no other elements

Inputs: 8. Input Commons: 1.
Output: 6. Output commons: 4.
Execution time: 0.32µs. Data memory: 12,285. Bit memory: 4096. High
Speed Counter.
Interrupt: 8 input interrupt X0 to X7. Constant time interrupt (0.5ms to
30sec). Interrupt subroutine jump time: 10 micro sec .
PID: PID algorithm (with auto tuning). I-PD algorithm (with auto
tuning).10ms cycle to 100s cycle.
Dimension (w, h, d): 60 x 90 x 79mm.
10 Tachogenerator
TECNEL/T. Tachogenerator
The Tachogenerator, as a speed transducer, provides a means of converting
the rotational speed into an analog voltage signal. Thus, it is mainly used for
measuring the motor speed. The TECNEL/T is an automatic unit, that could
be permanently connected to the main rotor.
Output voltage gradient: 30 +/- 3% V /1000 r.p.m.
Electrical supply: continuous d.c. output 0-100 V.
Dimensions: 200 x 150 x 50 mm. approx. Weight: 1Kg. approx.
TECNEL/TM. Hand Tachometer

This is a hand optical tachogenerator. It cannot be attached to the motor,
what implies that the measurements have to be taken manually.

Data Acquisition
11 MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
MUAD is the perfect link between the EME unit and the PC. MUAD is a continuous data
Cables to Data acquisition acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures, analyzes and represents
1 interface software
2
(MUAD/SOF) the parameters involved in the process.
3 MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
Data acquisition
Connections
points frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
(DAB)
4
board
“n” Electric power Cable to
We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the EME unit with the
Student supplied cables (there are several connection points placed for it). The EPIB is
EME unit (EPIB) post connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the student can get results from the
undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with them.

1)Hardware :
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for their later
treatment and visualisation.
Front panel separated in two: left-hand part for VOLTAGE sensors, and right-hand part for CURRENT
Sensors.
- 8 analog input channels. - Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second). EPIB
- 4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. - 4 Current sensors.

Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential. Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
4.- Electricity
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second). DAB
Analog output: Number of channels=2. Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Digital Input/Output: Number channels=24inputs/outputs.

Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of different signals.
Visualization of circuit tensions on the computer screen.
Sampling rate up to 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
MUAD/SOF
Software
With no physical connection between motor and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the Student Software
Motor + (EMT../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher knows at any moment what is
the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students. These, on the other hand, get a
virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the information on the subject of study.
Instructor Student/Motor
Software Software

- Print reports.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the motors, and working in network
EMT../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student Software)
Explains how to use the motor and run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each motor has its own Student Software package.
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total understanding of
the studied subject.
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the motors,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the knowledge obtained.
Available Student Software Packages:
-EMT1/SOF. DC Independent excitation motor-generator. -EMT12/SOF. Universal motor (single-phase).
-EMT2/SOF. DC Series excitation motor-generator. -EMT14/SOF. Repulsion motor, single-phase with short-circuited brushes.
-EMT3/SOF. DC Shunt excitation motor-generator. -EMT15/SOF. DC Permanent magnet motor.
-EMT4/SOF. DC Compound excitation motor-generator. -EMT16/SOF. Asynchronous single-phase motor with starting and running
-EMT5/SOF. DC Shunt-series compound excitation motor. capacitor.
-EMT6 /SOF. AC Synchronous alternator motor. -EMT17/SOF. Three-phase motor of squirrel cage with “Y” connection.
-EMT7 /SOF. Asynchronous three-phase motor with squirrel cage. -EMT18/SOF. DC Brushless motor.
-EMT8 /SOF. Asynchronous three-phase motor with wound rotor. -EMT19/SOF. Stepper motor.
-EMT9 /SOF. Dahlander three-phase (two-speeds). -EMT20/SOF. Asynchronous single-phase motor with split phase.
-EMT10/SOF. Asynchronous three-phase motor with two independent speeds. -EMT21/SOF. Three-phase Reluctance motor.
-EMT11/SOF. Asynchronous single-phase motor with starting capacitor. -EMT22/SOF. Single-phase Shaded Pole motor.
Page 68
EMT-S. Cut Away Motors:

Available cut away motors:
-EMT1-S. DC Independent excitation motor-generator. -EMT12-S. Universal motor (single-phase).
-EMT2-S. DC Series excitation motor-generator. -EMT14-S. Repulsion motor, single-phase with short-
-EMT3-S. DC Shunt excitation motor-generator. circuited brushes.
-EMT4-S. DC Compound excitation motor-generator. -EMT15-S. DC Permanent magnet motor.
-EMT5-S. DC Shunt-series compound excitation motor. -EMT16-S. Asynchronous single-phase motor with
-EMT6-S. AC Synchronous alternator motor. starting and running capacitor.
-EMT7-S. Asynchronous three-phase motor with -EMT17-S. Three-phase motor of squirrel cage with “Y”
squirrel cage. connection.
-EMT8-S. Asynchronous three-phase motor with wound -EMT18-S. DC Brushless motor.
rotor. -EMT19-S. Stepper motor.
-EMT9-S. Dahlander three-phase (two-speeds). -EMT20-S. Asynchronous single-phase motor with split
-EMT10-S. Asynchronous three-phase motor with two phase.
independent speeds. -EMT21-S. Three-phase Reluctance motor.
-EMT11-S. Asynchronous single-phase motor with -EMT22-S. Single-phase Shaded Pole motor.
starting capacitor.
ESAM. Faults Simulation Trainer in Electrical Motors

Teaching trainer for the simulation of non-destructive faults in three-phase 1.- Detection of fault on a phase.
motors. Application of diagnostic and localization.
2.- Detection of fault on the supply
Unit and motor are mounted in a painted steel structure.
Unit: voltage.
Steel box. 3.- Coils with turns in short circuit.
Electrical diagram of the motor on the front panel. The motor can be 4.- Measurement the resistance of the
connected in star or delta connection. windings.
Connections for the measurements. The resistance of the windings can be 5.- Detection of open-ended coil.
measured. Pilot lamps. 6-position selector for the selection of the fault 6.- Detection of short circuit in coils from
4.- Electricity
sequences. Switch for faults activation. different phase.
Faults are implemented by means a PLC and internal relays. This lets the 7.- Measurement the resistance
motor can keep on working in different conditions when certain faults are
caused. between coils from different
6 fuses of 2A to protect the motor. phases.
Automatic Magnetothermal Differential switch. 8.- Detection of ground fault.
Dahlander three-phase motor (0.3 to 0.5 CV), including cable and 9.- Measurement of the insulation
connector. resistance between the winding and
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. the motor case.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 10.- Motor in star connection.
Dimensions: 800 mm x 400 mm x 400 mm approx. Weight: 30Kg. approx. 11.- Motor in delta connection.
units/electricity/machines/ESAM.pdf
ESAE. Electrical Faults Simulation Trainer

Steel box. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the
elements in the real unit.
With this trainer the following troubles or faults, among others, may be fixed
and determined:
-Power off.
-Fuse blown.
-Defective main circuit broker. Defective leak current coil relay.
-Ground fault.
-Detection of fault on the supply voltage.
-Capacitor:Starting capacitor open and run capacitor open, starting
capacitor shorted and run capacitor shorted.
-Thermostat contacts stuck open and closed.
-Relay contacts stuck closed. Relay windings open.
-Fan:Fan motor windings open and shorted. Fan relay windings open and
shorted. Fan relay contacts stuck closed. Fan relay contacts are rusting. Fan
thermostat contacts stuck closed. Fan thermostat sensor bulb stuck
opened.
-Motor: Starting motor windings open and shorted. Running motor
windings open and shorted.
-Compressor: Thermal overload open. Compressor motor winding
grounded.
-Low voltage.
units/electricity/machines/ESAE.pdf
EEA. Alternators Study Unit

Unit for the study of alternators. Starting, operation and regulation of an 1.- Starting, voltage and frequency
alternator without load, half load and full load.
The unit comprises: regulation in a three -phase
Base structure (painted steel and anodized aluminium). alternator.
Couplings. Connectors. 2.- Typical practices for a three-phase
EMT7. Asyncrhonous Three-phase motor of squirrel cage:
alternator.
Power: 250-300W. Speed: 2769 r.p.m. (50Hz), 3330 r.p.m. (60Hz).
Connections: Star/triangle. 3.- Characteristic curve of an alternator
Frequency: 50/60 Hz. V.Armature:230/400V (50Hz), 250/440V. without load.
(60Hz). I.Armature nominal:1A-0.7A.
4.- Characteristic curve of an alternator
EMT6. A. C. Syncrhonous alternator motor:
Power: 250-300W. Speed: 3000 r.p.m. Frequency: 50Hz. in short circuit.
Connections: Star/triangle. 5.- Characteristic curve of an alternator
V.excitation nominal: 220V D.C. I.Excitation nominal: 0.59A. with load.
V.Armature.: 3x220/380V.
VVCA/B. AC motors speed controller: 6.- Synchronous motor starting.
This unit enables to change the speed of an asynchronous motor, 7.- Working at a frequency given.
obtaining features which characterize a motor. 8.- Curves in V at constant power (1/4,
Maximum power: 750 W. Frequency from 0 to 60Hz.
Cables and accessories, for normal operation. 1/3, ½,1) PN and different power
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. factors.
Dimensions: 750 mm x 250 mm x 250mm approx. Weight: 30Kg. approx.
units/electricity/machines/EEA.pdf
ERP. Protection Relay Test:

ERP-UB. Protection and Relay Test Unit SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This is a teaching unit which gives students theoretical and practical
experience with several industrial relays. 1.- A wide range of practices and
Unit designed for comprehensive investigations into the theory and practice investigations into the performance
of electrical power system protection. and characteristics of a variety of
This unit is common for the relays modules type “ERP” and can use one or different industrial relays.
more relays.
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in
stainless steel.
Floor-standing unit. It uses genuine industrial relays, not simulations, with
full range of safety features incorporated throughout.
Diagrams on the unit enable students to set up and perform practices and
experiments with minimal supervision.
Comprehensive controls, transformers, supplies and instrumentation.
It includes desk space for users or students to work on, and mounting area
for relays.
It is supplied with relay support software.
Selection of up-to-date numerical protection relays, specially adapted for
educational use. (See available relays).
Unit controls and instrumentations specifications:
0 to 10 A variable current supply.0 to 220 V variable voltage supply.
2 fault limiting resistors. Timed fault application circuit breaker.
Configurable tapped transformer with delta or star secondary. Variable
three-phase load star connected. Variable three-phase load delta
connected. 2 sets of three-phase voltage transformers. 4 sets of three-
phase current transformers. Mains isolator.
Test circuits:
Configurable transformer test circuit. Relay test area. Transmission line
model (5 x 50 km).
Cables and accessories, for normal operation.
Manuals: this unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
4.- Electricity
Dimensions(approx.): 2500mm x 1000mm x 1800mm. Weight: 600 Kg.

units/electricity/machines/ERP.pdf
ERP-SFT. Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay Module

For use with the Protection and Relay Test Unit (ERP-UB), to enable
1.-A wide range of practices and
investigations into protection and monitoring of transformers, transmission
lines and distribution schemes. investigations into the characteristics
Modern and robust enclosure (steel box) with carrying handles. and performance of an industrial over
Modern industrial over current and earth fault relay presented in an
educational and teaching format. current and earth fault relay.
The connections are via safety sockets.
The main functions:
Three-phase earth and overcurrent: three independent stages, the first
stage selectable from any of 12 IDMT curves, the remaining stages
having a direct time characteristic (ANSI 50/51 and ANSI 50N/51N).
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49). High impedance restricted earth
fault (ANSI 64N). Undercurrent (ANSI 37). Broken conductor detection
(ANSI 46BC). Negative phase sequence overcurrent - two independent
stages (ANSI 46). Selectable blocking. Circuit monitoring. Trend, fault
and disturbance records.
The connection to the experimental circuit is via current transformers with
ratio to suit the inputs of the relay.
It allows an effective demonstration of the effect of current and voltage
transformer ratio, connection and rating on protective relays.
Accuracy: +- 5%. Current: 1 A (A.C.). Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.Operating
time: typically 10 ms to 25 ms.
ERP-SDND. Directional/Non Directional Overcurrent Relay Module

investigations into protection and monitoring of generator and transformer 1.-A wide range of practices and
schemes, overhead lines, underground cables and backup on high-voltage investigations into the performance
systems. and characteristics of an industrial
Modern and robust enclosure (steel box) with carrying handles.
directional/non directional
Modern industrial directional/non directional overcurrent relay presented
in an educational and teaching format. overcurrent relay.
The main functions:
Three independent stages of directional/non-directional phase
overcurrent (ANSI 50, ANSI 51, ANSI 67). Undercurrent (ANSI 37).
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49). Negative phase sequence
overcurrent (ANSI 46). Overvoltage (ANSI 59). Undervoltage (ANSI 27).
Directional/non-directional earth fault (ANSI 67N, ANSI 50N, ANSI
51N). Creating fault and disturbance records. Selectable blocking.
Accuracy: +- 10%. Current: 1 A (A. C.). Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.
Operating time: typically 10 ms to 25 ms.
Page 70
4.4- Electrical Machines
ERP. Protection Relay Test: (continuation)
ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Module SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
For use with Protection and Relay Test Unit (ERP-UB) , to enable
investigations into protection of transformers, autotransformers, generators 1.-A wide range of practices and
and other apparatus with two windings. investigations into the performance
It demonstrates the characteristics of three-phase differential protection.
Modern and robust enclosure (steel box) with carrying handles. and characteristics of an industrial
Modern industrial differential protection relay presented in an educational differential protection relay.
and teaching format.
The main functions:
Differential protection (ANSI 87). Thermal overload protection (ANSI
49). Definete time overcurrent protection (ANSI 50P, ANSI 50Q and
ANSI 50N/G). Inverse time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51P, ANSI 51Q
and ANSI 51N/G).
Connection to the primary and secondary windings of the experimental is
circuit via current transformers with ratio to suit the inputs of the relay. This
provides an effective demonstration of the effect of current and voltage
Accuracy: +- 5%. Current: 1 A (A. C.). Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz. Operating
Dimensions(approx.): 490x400x310 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
ERP-MA. Feeder Management Relay Module

4.- Electricity
investigations into protection and monitoring of overhead lines and
underground cables. investigations into the performance
Modern industrial feeder management relay presented in an educational feeder management relay.
The main functions:
4 independent stages of directional/non-directional overcurrent
(ANSI 50, ANSI 51, ANSI 67). Directional/non-directional earth fault
(ANSI 50N, ANSI 51N, ANSI 67N). Sensitive directional/non-
directional earth fault. Sensitive directional earth fault. Wattmetric
earth fault (ANSI 32N). Restricted earth fault (ANSI 64N).
Directional/non-directional negative sequence overcurrent (ANSI
46, ANSI 67). Under and overvoltage (ANSI 27, ANSI 59). Thermal
overload protection (ANSI 49). Residual overvoltage (ANSI 59N).
Under and over frequency. Negative sequence overvoltage (ANSI
47). Selectable blocking. Broken conductor. Creating fault and
disturbance records.
ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Module

investigations into protection and monitoring of overhead transmission 1.-A wide range of practices and
lines. investigations into the performance
Modern industrial distance protection relay presented in an educational and characteristics of an industrial
and teaching format. distance protection relay.
The main functions:
Full scheme phase and ground distance protection, up to five zones
(ANSI 21G and ANSI 21P). Directional/non-directional earth fault
(ANSI 50N, ANSI 51N, ANSI 67N). Directional/non-directional
phase overcurrent (ANSI 50, ANSI 51, ANSI 67). Directional/non-
directional negative sequence overcurrent (ANSI 46, ANSI 67).
Broken conductor. Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49). Creating
fault and disturbance records. Blocking of any one protection
element.
See NEW UNITS of this Area in this link: www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=electricity&subarea=machines&lang=en
Page 71
4.5- Electrical Machines Kits
EMT-KIT. Disassembly Machines Kit
This Disassembly Machines Kit “EMT-KIT” allows the The student can study and make theses
student to construct, operate and make more than 50 machines assemblies:
assemblies and practices of different electrical 1.- Machines operating principles.
machines.
2.- Electromagnetism introduction.
We have designed EMT-KIT to introduce students to
electrical machines basic principles and a good 3.- Basic DC and AC generators.
understanding of motors and generators operation. 4.- DC shunt motor (with and without
The student, using this Kit, will see clearly the machines interpoles).
components and how interconnecting them, both 5.- DC shunt motor faults.
electrically and mechanically.
6.- DC series motor (with and without
The different machines have protected rotating parts,
interpoles).
use low voltages, but the machines characteristics are
7.- DC compound motor (with and
compatible to their industrial models equivalents.
without interpoles).
Baseplate.
Frame ring. 8.- DC shunt generator (with and
Fixed and removable bearing housings.
Shaft. 9.- DC series generator (with and
Squirrel cage rotor.
4.- Electricity
Wound stator. 10.- DC compound generator (with and

Centrifugal switch. without interpoles).
Couplings. 11.- DC separately excited generator
Hand crank. (with and without interpoles).
Interpoles. 12.- Single-phase AC series universal
Armature poles and Hub. motor.
Armature, field and interpole coils. 13.- Single-phase AC induction motor,
Compound field coils. squirrel cage (4 pole).
Field poles. 14.-Single-phase AC induction motor,
Brush holders. squirrel cage (2 pole).
Brushes.
15.- Single-phase AC synchronous
Commutator/slip rings. motor/generator (4 pole).
Robust case for the elements.
16.- Single-phase AC synchronous
Necessary tools and elements for normal working motor/generator (2 pole).
operation.
17.- Single-phase AC repulsion motor.
All machines that may be assembled use low
voltage. 18.-Single-phase AC generator, rotating
Protected rotating parts. armature.
Operating at low power levels. 19.- Single-phase AC generator, rotating

Control switches and resistive and capacitive field.
elements included. 20.- AC brushless generator.
Power supply system:
21.- Three-phase AC induction motor,
The mains supply required is a 5-wire, squirrel cage (4 pole).
380/415V three-phase 50/60Hz power
22.- Three-phase AC induction motor,
system with neutral and earth connections.
squirrel cage (2 pole).
The power supplies in the unit have over-
current circuit breakers for equipment 23.- Three-phase AC synchronous motor
(2 pole).
protection and differential protection for
student safety, and have variable voltage 24.- Three-phase AC synchronous
generator ( 2 pole).
outputs for DC, single-phase AC and three-
phase AC. 25.- Shaded pole induction motor.
This power supply has three-phase AC 26.- Split field series motor.
variable supply totally adjustable, single-
27.- Stepper motors.
phase AC variable supply totally adjustable
and DC power supply totally adjustable. This 28.- 4 pole induction motor faults.
unit cover all possibilities motors 29.- Pole changing induction motor.
requirements.
30.- Synchronous motor characteristics.
Brake dynamo.
Tacho-dynamo. 31.- Synchronisation.
Mobile elements are protected, and electrical 32.- AC motors power factor correction.
protections available.
33.- DC motor dynamic braking.
Manuals: This Kits is supplied with 8 manuals.

catalogues/en/units/electricity/machineskits/EMT-KIT.pdf
Page 72
5
Summarized
Catalogue
two (2)
5.- Energy
5. Energy
page
5.1. Energy: Simulation. 74

5.2. Energy Power Plants. 75-76
5.3. Alternative Energies. 77-79
5.4. Relays Units. 80-82
www.edibon.com
Page 73
5.1- Energy Simulation
SE3. Pure Software Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption, using just computers.
Integrated Software Simulator based on mathematical models for basic
1.- Conditions of operation.
systems. Generation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption. Power station:
1.- Generation: simulates electrical energy produced by nuclear, thermal - Performance and control of the
or hydraulic power plants. auxiliar services operations.
2.- Transport (Primary and Secondary Transport Networks), high voltage - Performance and control of the
Available in one package: lines and substations. The Simulator studies the connection between starting and stop sequencies of the
-Hydraulic Generation Version. Power Stations.
Generation Power Plants and the rest of distribution systems.
-Thermal Generation Version.
- Calculation and of the thermodynamic
-Nuclear Generation Version. 3.- Distribution (Third Distribution Network). It covers networks from the
variables in permanent regime.
secondary network to the final user. Distribution can be done by
- Wo r k i n g o f t h e g e n e r a t o r
different voltage levels (high, middle and low), using aerial lines and
protections.
cables. Network:
4.- Consumption: the electrical energy is converted into other energy - Calculation of the voltages at nodes,
forms: and their angles of phase shift.
- Mechanical: electrical motors. (Simulation of synchronoscope).
- Light: lighting systems. - Calculation of the active and
reactive power flux at the network
- Thermal: resistances, ovens, etc.
branches (Network with ideal
- Chemical: electrolysis, electrometallurgy,etc.
elements).
Basic configurations:
- Performance and control of the
This simulator can study electrical systems providing the following connection elements of the
configurations: substations, taking into account the
- 3 Generation Substations (Nuclear, Thermal and Pumping selection of the control type, the
Hydraulics). interlockings between connection
- 2 Interconnection Substations of the Transport Network. elements and with other elements,
and the synchronism between
- 4 Transformation Substations of Distribution Network.
nodes.
5.- Energy
- Interconnection lines and cables for different voltage levels.

- Setting up of the variable topology of
- 3 Consumption points (Industrial Plant, Commercial Point and the network (nodes-branches),
Appartment Building). according to the state of the
- Generator Protection relays for lines and other elements of the connection elements.
system (reactanes, capacitors and domestic applicances). - Operation of the protections (lines
Main characteristics: and transformers).
Power:
The simulated systems are the real ones, where operators develop
- Preselection of the active and
their professional activities.
reactive powers required.
The state changes of the real system, are simulated with the same
- Performance and control of the
sequence and temporal scale.
connection elements operation.
The trained operator is placed in a work environment very similar - Operation of the protections
to the real one. (motors, networks of use).
The simulator structure, makes the training program for the General:
development of each operator easier. - Determination for the electric and
Simulation of the real elements, thanks to the power stations magnetic fields of different
configurations of networks lines.
photographs digitalization.
2.- Options:
With this simulation equipment, the following teaching objectives can
- Simulation of the physic process of
be obtained:
energy conversion of Power station in
Improvement of the knowledge and practical experience of
non-permanent regimes (starting,
operators. etc..).
Decrease of the psychologic pressure of operators, in the - Calculation and graphic visualization
situations of system failure. of the instantaneous values of
Training of operators without previous experience, in a short time. currents.
Stimulation of operators for self-study and improvement of the - Real flux of charges, according to the
line impedances, transformers,
training their daily work.
etc...
units/energy/energypowerplants/APS12.pdf
Page 74
5.2- Energy Power Plants
PSS12. Complete Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption.
(SCADA control system included)
PSS12: Complete Configuration (14 Units).
1AG1. Generator Unit

2AG2. 3AT3. 4AL4. 5AC5.
Generator and Auxiliary Power Substation and Loads and Network
Services Cubicle Transformer Lines Cubicle Equivalents Cubicle
Basic Configuration = Mini PSS12. Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption (7 Units).
8BCE1.
Electric Control Desk
5.- Energy
6BEN1. 7BEL1. 9BPR2.
Electric Control Board 1 Electric Control Board 2 Electric Control Board 3
(Energy Generation) (Transformation and Lines) (Spare)
11CEP1.
10CVW1.Videowall Energy Control Desk
with SCADA System
included
12DAD1./13DAD2./14DAD3.
Control Boards (slides)
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/energypowerplants/APS12.pdf
See NEW UNITS of this Area in this link: www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=energypowerplants&lang=en
5.2- Energy Power Plants
PSS12. Complete Power Plant Simulator: Generation, Transformation, Transport, Distribution and Consumption.
(SCADA control system included) (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY SOME PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
General Possibilities Example for Hydroelectric Power Plant:
Experiments for Simulator Knowledge:
Differences between Simulators of the different Power Plants: EXPERIMENTS FOR SIMULATOR KNOWLEDGE (ESK)
ESK 1. Simulated Hydroelectric Power Station.
1) Specific study of Simulator behaviour. 1.1. General description.
! The selection of one type of Power Plant or another one will make the 1.2. Layout.
system to behave according to a specific simulation. 1.3. Main wiring diagram.
! The Simulator carries out a complex mathematical modelling that will 1.4. One-line electrical schema.
1.5. Mosaic type structure diagrams.
allow studying the real behaviour of the Power Plant during the primary 1.6. Unit Steady States (USS).
energy conversion. 1.7. Procedures for Unit Starting (PUS) and Shut Down (PUD).
! All Power Plant parameters can be edited allowing to modify and 1.8. Electrical and Hydraulics conditions for USS ,PUS and PUD.
adequate to specific Power Plants cases. For example, in the Hydroelectric 1.9. Operation modes.
type: rain amount, affluents, pipes, bumpy textures, etc. ESK 2-6. Overall presentation of simulation models:
ESK 2. Model of the Energy Conversion in a Hydroelectric Power Station.
ESK 3. Model of Generation Unit and Auxiliary Services.
2) Power Plant Control. All procedures. ESK 4. Model of Main Transformer, Substation and Interconnection Lines.
! Each different starting, operation and stop procedures belongs to each ESK 5. Model of Loads and Network Equivalent.
specific Power Plant. ESK 6. Model of Control Room.
! During the process there will appear some images of real Power Plants ESK 7-22. Operation instructions for the different parts of the Equipment:
while an animated simulation will show how our Power Plant works. ESK 7. Operations from Hydraulic Control Boards.
! It shows the real procedures that happens in a real Power Plant. ESK 8-10. Operations from Hydraulic Control Desk:
ESK 8. Software operations on Hydraulic Control Desk:
-Circuit Breaker Faults
3) Possibility to use different types of Power Plants at the same time. -Alarms
! Apart from the particular study of each type of Power Plant and the -……….
operation (generation) synchronized with the national electrical network, ESK 9. Operation of Generator Excitation System from Hydraulic Control Desk.
the simulator allows an interconnection between different types of Power ESK 10. Operation of Power Electronic Converter from Hydraulic Control Desk.
Plants. This will allow a real Network Simulation, studying the figure of ESK 11-12. Operations from Electric Control Boards:
system operator and regulating the combined operation of the different ESK 11. Operations of the protective relays.
ESK 12. Other operations on the Electric Control Boards.
Power Plants types. ESK 13-14. Operations from Electric Control Desk:
ESK 13. Control and signalling of switchgear, taking into account interlockings.
Main Target ESK 14. Generator frequency and voltage adjustments.
ESK 15. Generator Unit.
! The main target of this Simulator is to train technical students, workers and ESK 16-17. Operations on Generator and Auxiliary Services Cubicle:
even teachers, in how the Energy can be generated, transformed, transported, ESK 16. Measurements of generator and auxiliary services quantities.
distributed and how it can be consumed. ESK 17.Location and type of fault selection for Synchronous generator protection
system.
! Additionally PSS12 allows to simulate all the procedures carried out in real ESK 18. Power transformer.
power plant to star up the generation plant, to run it and to connect it to the ESK 19-20. Operations on Substation and Lines Cubicle
National grid (Electrical Network), etc. ESK 19. Adjustment of lines 1 and 2 lengths.
ESK 20. Location and fault type selection on lines 1 and 2.
ESK 21-22. Operations from Loads and Network Equivalents Cubicle
Structure of the Complete Simulator ESK 21. Type and level of load selection.
ESK 22. Network equivalents selection.
5.- Energy
ESK 23. Videowall.

The Complete Simulator is formed by two main parts, the first part (a) with 14 Experiments for Operational Simulation:
Units and the second one (b) the Simulation with Generation System Software Unit starting and shutdown procedures (EOS 1-17)
(Hybrid System). EOS 1-14. Starting procedures.
Starting unit to running in island- PUS 12
a) Small Scale Electric Power System: EOS 1. Manual starting.
EOS 2. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
This Small Scale Electric Power System consists of 14 different units (1AG1 Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1- PUS 13.
Generator Unit, 2AG2 Generator and Auxiliary Services Cubicle, 3AT3 EOS 3. Manual starting.
Power Transformer, 4AL4 Substation and Lines Cubicle, 5AC5 Loads and EOS 4. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Network Equivalents Cubicle, 6BEN1 Electric Control Board 1 (energy Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1-PUS 13.2
generation), 7BEL1 Electric Control Board 2 (transformation and lines), EOS 5. Manual starting.
8BCE1 Electric Control Board 3 (spare), 9BPR2 Electric Control Desk, EOS 6. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
10CVW1 Videowall, 11CEP1 Energy Control Desk, 12DAD1-13DAD2- Starting unit to running connected to network through Line 1-PUS 13.3
EOS 7. Manual starting.
14DAD3 Control Boards (slides)). EOS 8. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
Starting unit to running feeding isolated loads through Line 1- PUS 14.1
This Complete Simulator is built with the same devices as those used in the EOS 9. Manual starting.
real Power Plants. Therefore the system reproduces at small scale the EOS 10. Guide-operator and automatic starting.
functioning of a real Power System. Starting unit to running feeding isolated loads through Line 2- PUS 14.2
EOS 11. Manual starting.
Not only the steps for starting a Power Plant, but many faults can be Starting unit to running feeding isolated loads through Lines 1 and 2- PUS 14.3
simulated. EOS 13. Manual starting.
b) Software Packages: EOS 15-17. Shutdown procedures
8 Software Packages, which allow to simulate 8 different Electric Power Normal shutdown PUD-N
Plants, as follow: EOS 15. Manual shutdown.
EOS 16. Guide-operator and automatic shutdown.
! Nuclear Power Station (ref. CN). Emergency shutdown PUD-E
! Diesel Thermal Station (ref. CTD). EOS 17. Emergency shutdown
! Fossil Fuel Thermal Station (ref. CTCF). Unit operating in normal regime (EOS 18- 58)
! Combined Cycle Thermal Station (ref. CTCC). EOS 18-29. Unit feeding isolated loads with automatic frequency control and voltage
! Hydroelectric Station (ref. CHD). adjustment at remote substation busbars.
Through Line 1 (USS 4.1)
! Wind-powered Station (ref. CE). EOS 18. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure resistive loads.
! Photovoltaic Solar Station (ref. CSFV). EOS 19. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure inductive loads.
! Heliothermic Solar Station (ref. CHST). EOS 20. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different pure capacitive loads.
EOS 21. Determine voltage drop through line 1 with different mixed loads.
H and anyone requested by the customer. Through Line 2 (USS 4.2)
EOS 22. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure resistive loads.
EOS 23. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure inductive loads.
This is an Hybrid System as combines hardware and software using the proper EOS 24. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different pure capacitive loads.
mathematics models. EOS 25. Determine voltage drop through line 2 with different mixed loads.
The final configuration of the Complete Simulator will be formed by: Through Lines 1 and 2 (USS 4.3)
1) One small scale Electric Power System. EOS 26.Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure resistive
2) At least, one of the eight Software Packages mentioned above. The loads.
EOS 27.Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure inductive
customer will decide which (any or all of them) of the software packages loads.
wants to buy. EOS 28. Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different pure capacitive
loads.
c) SCADA System. This unit uses a control and acquisition system (SCADA) EOS 29. Determine voltage drop through lines 1 and 2 with different mixed loads.
in both versions MINI PSS12 and PSS12. EOS 30-33. Unit feeding isolated loads through Line 2 (USS 4.2) with automatic frequency
control and voltage adjustment at substation bars.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ ...Etc. (See APS12 catalogue)
units/energy/energypowerplants/APS12.pdf
See NEW UNITS of this Area in this link: www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=energypowerplants&lang=en
Page 76
5.3- Alternative Energies
EESTC. Computer Controlled Thermal Solar Energy Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2 3 4
Control Data Software for:
6 Manuals
1 Unit: EESTC. Thermal Solar Energy Unit

1 EESTC Unit: Items supplied as standard
The unit is a system that transforms solar energy into calorific energy. This unit uses the thermosiphon system to heat water or 1 .- Study of how the thermosiphon works.
the traditional pumping system. In both cases,the absorbed calorific energy is given by the solar radiation simulated, in our
case, by a panel with powerful luminous sources. 2 .- Study of the lamp illumination profile.
Panels and main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel. 3 .- Study of the solar collector efficiency.
Solar panel (Thermal solar collector): Steel structure. Piped (already prepared) to connect the panel and the accumulator.
Closed expansion vessel. Over pressure security valve. Two manometers. Temperature sensors. 4 .- Free circulation: Inclination angle
Thermal accumulator tank: Vacuum vitrified heater, high efficiency heating and anticorrosion protections. It has a influence on the equipment efficiency.
supporting heating group, with a regulation electric resistor. Contact thermostat to control temperature.
Solar simulator: Aluminum structure regulated in height. Sixteen ultraviolet lamps of 300 W each one. Electricity security 5 .- Relationship between the flow and the
group, made up by 3 magnetothermic. Feed wire.
Pumping equipment: Impulse pump. 3 Flowmeters. temperature.
10 Temperature sensors. 2 Flow sensors. 6 .- Energy balance of the solar collector.
2 EESTC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous 7 .- Energy balance in the accumulator
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real tank.
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the 8 .- Experimental efficiency determination.
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface and the third one in 9 .- Influence of the incidence angle over
the control software. the temperature.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up Other possible practices:
to:250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 EESTC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: 10.-Sensors calibration.
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up 11.-Flowmeter calibration.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 12-30.- Practices with PLC.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 2200x1200x2005 mm. Weight: 300 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
5.- Energy
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/alternativeenergies/EESTC.pdf
EESFC. Computer Controlled Photovoltaic Solar Energy Unit

Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2 3 4

6 Manuals

1 Unit: EESFC. Photovoltaic
Solar Energy Unit
1 EESFC Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure, galvanized steel and stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with 1.- Lamps illumination profile power with the power input.
similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2 Photovoltaic polycrystalline panels. study. 12.- D e t e r m i n a t e o f t h e
Solar simulator: structure adjustable in height, 16 ultraviolet lamps of 300 W each one, kit of electric 2.- Efficiency experimental parameters that define the
security, made up of 3 thermomagnetic switches, power cable. determination. quality of a solar cell.
Sensors: temperature sensors, instantaneous current sensors, instantaneous voltage sensors, 3.- Influence of the angle of 13.- Solar cell measurement.
instantaneous power sensors, Rms current sensors, Rms voltage sensors, Rms power sensors. incidence on the 14.- Measurement of the solar
Load regulator, with LED indicator of state and with protection diodes. Adjustable load. temperature. panel voltage in the
OPTIONAL (not included in the standard supply): 4.- Determination of the vacuum.
EESFC-KIT. Kit of charge, conversion and consumption simulation: material that makes up the 15.- Determination of the cells
Energy accumulation and voltages conversion: 2 Batteries, 35 A./hour. Inverter, 150W. solar cell. disposition in a solar panel.
Different loads: fluorescent lamps. Incandescent lamps. DC Motor, 12V. AC Motor, 220V. 5.- Determination of the p and 16.- M e a s u r e m e n t o f t h e
n side of a solar cell. maximum power for a solar
2 EESFC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
6.- Determination of the first panel with load.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer quadrant of the I-V curve, 17.- Measurement of the solar
controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. without illumination of the panel voltage in the
Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ solar cell. vacuum with constant
values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external 7.- Determination of the illumination and different
interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the inverse current or the temperature.
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time saturation current with 18.- Study of V,I,W according to
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, regard to a solar cell different loads.
electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. without illumination. 19.- Familiarization with the
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 8.- Determination of the regulator parameters.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. resistance in series and in Other possible practices:
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. parallel of a solar cell 20.- Sensors calibration.
4 EESFC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: without illumination. Practices to be done with the
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of 9.- Dependence of the voltage OPTIONAL KIT “EESFC-KIT”:
data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second guaranteed. It allows the registration of the of open circuit ( Voc ) with 21.- Connection of loads to
alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. the lumens. direct voltage.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 10.- D e t e r m i n a t i o n t h e
22.- Connection of loads to
characteristic parameters alternating voltage of 220
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 2200x1200x2005 mm. Weight: 300 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. of a solar cell with V.
Weight: 10 Kg. illumination. 23-41.-Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/ 11.- Relation of the maximum
alternativeenergies/EESFC.pdf
5.3- Alternative Energies (continuation)
MINI-EESF. Photovoltaic Solar Energy Modular Trainer

Photovoltaic Solar Energy Modular Trainer "MINI-EESF", is a 1.- Determination of the constituent
laboratory scaled unit designed to study all the parameters governing material of the solar cell.
the Solar radiation direct conversion into electricity. 2.- Determination of the I-V first
The trainer is based on a panel or framework in which some quadrant curve without illuminating
application modules can be installed, and on photovoltaic solar the solar cell.
panels that can be assembled in mobile structures. 3.- Determination of the inverse (or
Supply to the public network or an alternating consumption. saturation) current of the cell without
Photovoltaic module: illumination.
Solar panel mounted on an anodized aluminum structure with wheels 4.- Determination of parallel and series
for mobility, and with calibrated cell to measure the solar irradiation. resistance of a solar cell without
It consists of 36 high performance single-cristal silicon photovoltaic illumination.
cells (35x55 mm), with a typical power of 50Wp for a 17Vdc voltage. 5.- Dependency of the open circuit
Both the protections and the used materials give it water proof voltage (Voc) with lumens (luminous
properties, abrasion protection, hail impact protection and several flux).
other adverse environmental factors protection. 6.- Determination of the parameters
Technical data: that describe the quality of a solar
Maximum nominal power: 66W. Voltage on Pmax point (Vmp): cell.
17.8 V. Intensity on Pmax point (Imp): 3.70 A. Short-circuit current 7.- Measurement of the solar energy.
(Isc): 4.05 A. Open circuit voltage (Voc): 22.25 V. 8.- Measurement of the solar panel
Dimensions: (length x width x thickness) 780 x 660 x 35.5 mm. voltage in vacuum.
Weight: 3 Kg. approx. 9.- Determination of the disposition of
Anodized aluminum practices framework. Battery offering optimal cells in a solar panel.
performance with low power applications. Capacity: 32Ah with 96 10.- Familiarisation with the regulator
Wh per day. Set of interconnection cables. Solar energy calculations parameters.
software (CD-ROM). 11.- Loads connection to a 12 Volts DC.
ES10. Electronic regulation module (charge regulator), including 12.- Loads connection to a 220 Volts
a LCD screen. Charge regulator admits 12-24V voltage. AC.
Its reading allows to know the charging state of the battery,
5.- Energy
as well as the panel charging current. Moreover, the

regulator has an add-on security: protection against
polarity inversion and short-circuit, through electronic
protection against overload, fuse-protected and extremely
low electromagnetic waves emission.
ES20. Loads module. Incorporating two 12 V, 50W lamps, with
independent switches.
ES30. Converter module from DC to AC. The so called DC/AC
converter is an inverter for DC to AC conversion. The
output voltage is a semi-sinusoidal 220 V, 50 Hz or 110 V,
60 Hz. The output power is 150 W for direct power and a
maximum power of 300 W, having a 12 Vdc supply.
ES40. AC Voltage measurements module until 250V. and DC
until 30 V.
ES50. Loads module. Including two lamps of 220V. or 110V., 50
W., with independent switches.
ES60. Network inverter module. It receives 24 V and supplies sine
wave alternating voltage of 220 V that is synchronised in
phase with the energy of the public network. It supplies
until 100 W power.
ES60/PC. Network inverter module, which can be controlled by
computer (PC), through RS-232 port.
ES70. Wattmeter module of alternating current until 750 W.
ES80. Module for measurements of solar irradiation (W/m2 ) and
measurements of current until 10 A.
ES90. Module for 12 V. battery control. (A maximum of two
batteries can be incorporated in the module).
Cables and Accessories for normal operation.
Other versions available:

MINI-EESF/M. Photovoltaic Solar Energy Modular Trainer.
MINI-EESF/B. Photovoltaic Solar Energy Modular Trainer.
en/units/energy/alternativeenergies/MINI-EESF.pdf
Page 78
5.3- Alternative Energies
EEEC. Computer Controlled Wind Energy Unit
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2 3 4

- Data Management
6 Manuals

1 Unit: EEEC. Wind Energy Unit

1 EEEC Unit: Items supplied as standard
This Unit is a laboratory-scale unit designed to study the eolic energy and the influence of some factors on this generation. 1.- Study of the aerogenerator operation
Anodized aluminium structure. Main metallic elements in stainless steel. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution in function of the wind speed
that the elements in the real unit. variation.
Stainless steel tunnel of 2200 x 700 x 700 mm approx., which includes a window of 1100 x 200 mm approx. Aerogenerator
of 6 blades, power: 60 W, aerogenerator diameter: 510mm. Axial fan with speed variation for the wind simulation, 2.- Angle of incidence variation.
computer controlled. 3.- Load variation influence on the
Sensors: aerogenerator.
Temperature (“J” type) sensor. 4.- Study of the voltage, power and
Air speed sensor: turbulence air speed (instantaneous)and mean speed.
Speed sensor (aerogenerator). current.
Voltage, current and power sensors: instantaneous current, voltage and power. Rms current, voltage and power. 5.- Study of V, I, W in function of different
Load regulator. loads.
Loads module: variable load and fixed load. 6.- E f f i c i e n c y e x p e r i m e n t a l
OPTIONAL (not included in the standard supply):
EEEC-KIT. Kit of charge, conversion and consumption simulation: determination.
Energy accumulation and voltages conversion: 2 Batteries, Inverter. 7.- Wind energy measurement.
Different loads: DC loads: DC lamps of 12V. + Rheostat and DC motor of 24-36V. 8.- Familiarization with the regulator
AC loads: Lamps of 220V-240V, 50-60Hz, 9W, and Fan of 230V. parameters.
2 EEEC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous 9.- Study of the power generated by he
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real aerogenerator depending on the
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered wind speed.
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of 10.- Study of the power generated by the
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in aerogenerator depending on the air
the control software. incident angle.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 11.- Sensors calibration.
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. Practices to be made with the OPTIONAL
4 EEEC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: KIT “EEEC-KIT”:
5.- Energy
12.- Loads connection to direct voltage.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 13.- Loads connection to alternating
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. voltage 220V.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 2200 x 700 x 700 mm. Weight:100Kg. Control Interface: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 14-32.-Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/energy/alternativeenergies/EEEC.pdf
BPPC. Computer Controlled Teaching and Research Biodiesel Pilot Plant

Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2 3 4
- Data Management
6 Manuals

1 Unit: BPPC. Teaching and Research Biodiesel Pilot Plant

1 BPPC. Unit: Items supplied as standard
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels an main metallic elements in stainless steel .Diagram in the front panel with similar
distribution that the elements in the real unit. Alcohol tank. Oil/fat tank. Pre-heater of alcohol. Reflux condenser. Total
condenser. Biodiesel reactor. Cooler. Recovered alcohol tank. Product tank: Glycerin. Product tank: Biodiesel. Temperature
sensors. Flow sensors.
2 PBBC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of
the PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one
in the control software.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 PBBC/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
to 250,000 data per second guaranteed. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
See NEW UNITS of this Area in this link: www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=energy&subarea=alternativeenergies&lang=en

5.4- Relays Units
ERP. Protection Relay Test:
ERP-UB. Protection and Relay Test Unit SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This is a teaching unit which gives students theoretical and practical

1.- A wide range of practices and
experience with several industrial relays.
Unit designed for comprehensive investigations into the theory and practice investigations into the performance
of electrical power system protection. and characteristics of a variety of
This unit is common for the relays modules type “ERP” and can use one or different industrial relays.
more relays.
Anodized aluminium structure. Panels and main metallic elements in
stainless steel.
Floor-standing unit. It uses genuine industrial relays, not simulations, with
full range of safety features incorporated throughout.
Diagrams on the unit enable students to set up and perform practices and
experiments with minimal supervision.
Comprehensive controls, transformers, supplies and instrumentation.
It includes desk space for users or students to work on, and mounting area
for relays.
It is supplied with relay support software.
Selection of up-to-date numerical protection relays, specially adapted for
educational use. (See available relays).
Unit controls and instrumentations specifications:
0 to 10 A variable current supply.0 to 220 V variable voltage supply.
2 fault limiting resistors. Timed fault application circuit breaker.
Configurable tapped transformer with delta or star secondary. Variable
three-phase load star connected. Variable three-phase load delta
connected. 2 sets of three-phase voltage transformers. 4 sets of three-
phase current transformers. Mains isolator.
Test circuits:
Configurable transformer test circuit. Relay test area. Transmission line
model (5 x 50 Km).
5.- Energy

units/energy/relaysunits/ERP.pdf
ERP-SFT. Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay Module
For use with the Protection and Relay Test Unit (ERP-UB), to enable 1.-A wide range of practices and
investigations into protection and monitoring of transformers, transmission
investigations into the characteristics
lines and distribution schemes.
and performance of an industrial over
current and earth fault relay.
Modern industrial over current and earth fault relay presented in an
educational and teaching format.
The main functions:
Three-phase earth and over current: three independent stages, the first
stage selectable from any of 12 IDMT curves, the remaining stages
having a direct time characteristic (ANSI 50/51 and ANSI 50N/51N).
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49). High impedance restricted earth
fault (ANSI 64N). Undercurrent (ANSI 37). Broken conductor detection
(ANSI 46BC). Negative phase sequence over current - two independent
stages (ANSI 46). Selectable blocking. Circuit monitoring. Trend, fault
and disturbance records.
Accuracy: +- 5%. Current: 1 A (A.C.). Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.Operating

Page 80
5.4- Relays Units (continuation)
ERP. Protection Relay Test: (continuation)

ERP-SDND. Directional/Non Directional Overcurrent Relay Module
investigations into protection and monitoring of generator and transformer
schemes, overhead lines, underground cables and backup on high-voltage investigations into the performance
systems. and characteristics of an industrial
Modern and robust enclosure (steel box) with carrying handles. directional/non directional
Modern industrial directional/non directional overcurrent relay presented
in an educational and teaching format. overcurrent relay.
The main functions:
Three independent stages of directional/non-directional phase
overcurrent (ANSI 50, ANSI 51, ANSI 67). Undercurrent (ANSI 37).
Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49). Negative phase sequence
overcurrent (ANSI 46). Overvoltage (ANSI 59). Undervoltage (ANSI 27).
Directional/non-directional earth fault (ANSI 67N, ANSI 50N, ANSI
51N). Creating fault and disturbance records. Selectable blocking.
Accuracy: +- 10%. Current: 1 A (A. C.). Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.
Operating time: typically 10 ms to 25 ms.
ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Module

For use with Protection and Relay Test Unit (ERP-UB) , to enable
investigations into protection of transformers, autotransformers, generators 1.-A wide range of practices and
and other apparatus with two windings. investigations into the performance
It demonstrates the characteristics of three-phase differential protection. and characteristics of an industrial
Modern industrial differential protection relay presented in an educational differential protection relay.
The main functions:
Differential protection (ANSI 87). Thermal overload protection (ANSI
5.- Energy
49). Definete time over current protection (ANSI 50P, ANSI 50Q and
ANSI 50N/G). Inverse time over current protection (ANSI 51P, ANSI
51Q and ANSI 51N/G).
Connection to the primary and secondary windings of the experimental is
circuit via current transformers with ratio to suit the inputs of the relay. This
provides an effective demonstration of the effect of current and voltage
Manuals: this unit is supplied with 8 manuals
ERP-MA. Feeder Management Relay Module

investigations into protection and monitoring of overhead lines and
underground cables. investigations into the performance
Modern industrial feeder management relay presented in an educational feeder management relay.
The main functions:
4 independent stages of directional/non-directional over current
(ANSI 50, ANSI 51, ANSI 67). Directional/non-directional earth fault
(ANSI 50N, ANSI 51N, ANSI 67N). Sensitive directional/non-
directional earth fault. Sensitive directional earth fault. Wattmetric
earth fault (ANSI 32N). Restricted earth fault (ANSI 64N).
Directional/non-directional negative sequence over current (ANSI
46, ANSI 67). Under and overvoltage (ANSI 27, ANSI 59). Thermal
overload protection (ANSI 49). Residual overvoltage (ANSI 59N).
Under and over frequency. Negative sequence overvoltage (ANSI
47). Selectable blocking. Broken conductor. Creating fault and
disturbance records.
5.4- Relays Units (continuation)
ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Module

investigations into protection and monitoring of overhead transmission investigations into the performance
lines. and characteristics of an industrial
Modern and robust enclosure (steel box) with carrying handles. distance protection relay.
Modern industrial distance protection relay presented in an educational
The main functions:
Full scheme phase and ground distance protection, up to five zones
(ANSI 21G and ANSI 21P). Directional/non-directional earth fault
(ANSI 50N, ANSI 51N, ANSI 67N). Directional/non-directional
phase over current (ANSI 50, ANSI 51, ANSI 67). Directional/non-
directional negative sequence over current (ANSI 46, ANSI 67).
Broken conductor. Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49). Creating
fault and disturbance records. Blocking of any one protection
element.
5.- Energy

Page 82
Summarized
Catalogue
two (2)
6.- Systems & Automatics

6. Systems &
Automatics
page
6.1. Systems. 84
6.2. Automatics. 85-87
6.3. Regulation and Control. 88
www.edibon.com
Page 83
6.1- Systems
SCE. Computer Controlled Generating Stations Control and Regulation Simulator
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2 3
Data Software for:
- Computer Control
Acquisition - Data Acquisition
Board - Data Management
5 Manuals
1 Unit: SCE. Generating Stations Control and Regulation
Simulator (System Engineering), including
control interface

1.- Modelization of the motor 11.- Comparative analysis of the
1 SCE Unit:
as a standard motor. transient response of the
Unit designed to simulate the regulation behaviour of a hydroelectric generating station ,as
a didactic application with different aspects of regulation, control and simulation. 2.- Modelization of the motor turbine real motor vs the
Anodized aluminum structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the of with the constants corrections transient response of the
the elements in the real unit. Main metallic elements in stainless steel. of the mathematical model. simulated motor for
It is possible to work with this unit in 2 ways: inductive load.
3.- Calculation of the dynamos
REAL mode (continuous or transient analysis). 12.- Comparative analysis of
SIMULATED mode. speed constant.
the response response of
The unit consists mainly of an interface for the conditioning of input and output signals. 4.- Obtaining of the transient the gate real motor vs the
For its part, this one will be connected to the computer (through a SCSI wire and a data responses of the gate response of the gate
acquisition board) and to the two subsystems that we try to control: motor. simulated motor for
Gate subsystem.
5.- Obtaining of the transient continuous control signals.
Turbine-generator subsystem.
The unit has (in the interface) some switches to establish different loads to the generator output response of the turbine 13.- Comparative analysis of the
and different conditions of the real system. motor. response of the gate real
Gate subsystem: motor vs the response of the
6.- Obtaining of the transient
It consists of a motor that controls the gate opening, and some mechanisms that gate simulated motor for
response of the gate
emulate it. sinusoidal control signals.
Turbine-generator system: simulated motor.
14.- Comparative analysis of the
This subsystem will be analyzed separately or linked up with the 7.- Obtaining of the transient
previous one, achieving that the motor that simulates the turbine turns according to the response of the gate real
response of the turbine motor vs the response
gate opening percentage.
simulated motor.
This turbine is connected with a generator system and with a system that simulates different of the gate simulated motor
loads (inductive, capacitive or resistive). 8.- C o m p a r a t i v e a n a l y s i s for square control signals.
Three loads in parallel are connected at the generator output, that simulate the between the responses
consumption of the energy distribution system: Variable resistance. Capacitance. of the practices 4,5,6, 15.- Comparative analysis of the
Inductance. and 7. response of the gate real
Control interface. motor vs the response of the
2 SCE/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
9.- Comparative analysis of gate simulated motor for
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage the transient response of triangular control signals.
of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second guaranteed. It allows the the turbine real motor vs
registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. the transient response of
This Software has got 2 operating modes: the simulated motor for
REAL mode: through motors, actuators and sensors that the unit includes (Continuous, resistive load.
transient). 10.-Comparative analysis of
SIMULATED mode: through the mathematical modelization of the motors, previously the transient response of the
mentioned.
turbine real motor v s t h e
transient response of the
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 500x450x200 mm. Weight: 25 Kg. simulated motor for
capacitive load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/automationsystems/
systems/SCE.pdf

SBB. Ball and Beam System
Unit for the study of the stabilization of a naturally unstable system, and
control of the position of the ball.
The system allows to place a ball moving along a guide, oscillating from the
central point, at any desired point of the guide.
Self-contained unit with direct connection to the main, and with interface
with other systems through terminals, to connect the inputs and outputs.
All power and electronics measurements inside de unit.
Possibility to use an analogical or digital controller.
The unit includes:
DC motor with gear box, and armature controlled, that alllows the
oscillating movement of the guide adjusted to the motor axis.
Rod with guide for ball displacement and Ball.
Ball position sensor in the guide, rod inclination angle (potentiometer) and
motor speed (tachometric dynamo).
units/automationsystems/systems/SBB.pdf
CPVM. DC Motor Position and Speed Control
Page 84
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes

(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
1 PLC-PI Unit: 1.- Control of theparticular unit 9.- PLC process application for the
process through the control particular unit.
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a interface box without the 10.- PLC structure.
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, computer. 11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the 2.- PID control. configuration.
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON 3.- Visualization of all the sensors 12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
Computerized Teaching Unit). values used in the particular 13.- PLC program languages.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. unit process. 14.- PLC different programming
Front panel: 4.- Calibration of all sensors standard languages (ladder
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs. included in the particular unit diagram (LD), structured text
process. (ST), instructions list (IL),
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs. 5.- Hand on of all the actuators sequential function chart
Touch screen. involved in the particular unit (SFC), function block diagram
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC process. (FBD)).
Inside: 6.- Realization of different 15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable. experiments, in automatic way, development of new process.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program without having in front the 16.- Hand on an established process.
particular unit. (These 17.- To visualize and see the results
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control. experiments can be decided
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. previously). and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC). 7.- Simulation of outside actions, 18.- Possibility of creating new
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software: in the cases do not exist process in relation with the
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit. hardware elements. (Example: particular unit.
test of complementary tanks, 19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. environment to the process to 20.- Own PLC applications in
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg. be studied, etc). accordance with teacher and
8.- PLC hardware general use. student requirements.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer

Always included
in the supply:

2 3
PLC PLCE
Programming Touch Screen
Software Programming Software
1 Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer

Items supplied as standard Using the PLC Programing Software:
1 PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple 1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, The programs can be written in several programming languages:
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. Function block diagram. (FBD).
Front panel: 2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push 3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of 4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital 5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass 6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
connections (GND). Touch screen. established in a variable.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC). 7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
Inside: 8.- How to use analog inputs.
Power supply 100... 240V (AC). 9.- How to use analog outputs.
Panasonic PLC: 10.- Use of temporizers.
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32 11.- Logic functions implementation.
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control. 12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. 13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming. 14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
2 PLC Programming Software: 15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages 16.- Functions library.
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential 17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration, 18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words, * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
function blocks, inputs/outputs... Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal 19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers, 20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC 21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software words).
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions 22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse 23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
of programs is easy. 24.- Switching from one screen to another.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software: * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy Other practical possibilities:
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps -It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
Editor. causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx. (for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ output, (for example: a pump).
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
6.2- Automatics
EDIBON FP-X-CPU. PLC

Inputs: 8.
Input Commons: 1.
Output: 6.
Output commons: 4.
Execution time: 0.32µs.
Data memory: 12,285.
Bit memory: 4096.
Dimension (w, h, d): 60 x 90 x 79mm.
High Speed Counter
Interrupt: 8 input interrupt X0 to X7. Constant time interrupt (0.5ms to 30sec).
Interrupt subroutine jump time: 10 micro sec .
PID: PID algorithm (with auto tuning). I-PD algorithm (with auto tuning).10ms
cycle to 100s cycle.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/EDIBON FP-X-CPU.pdf
EPID-T. Industrial Regulation Trainer, PID type. (Temperature)

Steel box with handles for an easy transport.
The processes regulator is integrated on the unit itself, as well as the universal
converter to measure the temperature.
Terminals for an easy and quick connection.
High accurecy temperature controller: PID control with +/- 0.2 scale
background.
Possibility of 18 types of analog inputs (thermocouples: K, J, R, S, B, E, T, etc.;
inputs in current, inputs in voltage, RTD), connected to terminal connections
2 digital inputs, connected to some terminal connections, with input for a 4
wires thermoresistance.
3 digital outputs. 3 different types of outputs: relay output, output in voltage
and output in current 4-20mA DC.
Auto tuning for PID automatic setting.
An alarm in case of heater breakdown is available.

2nd. optional output for the heat-cold control, ON/OFF control of double
actuation.
Communication functions: RS485 ASCII / Modbus.
Double display for visualization of the actual value and of the set point
control.
Programing software.
Programing and visualization from computer (PC).
Cables and Accessories for normal operation.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals
Dimensions(approx.): 310mm x 220mm x 145mm.
Weight:5 Kg. approx.

units/automationsystems/automationcontrol/EPID-T.pdf
CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer

Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the To study methods and terminology of
study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial process control:
process controller.
1.-Closed loop control.
Steel box.
Configurable digital controller: 2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. 3.-To study the step response.
Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s. 4.-Reference variable step.
Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on
To learn and to familiarise with a process
computer (PC).
controller:
Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V.
5.-Configuration level.
Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2
voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V. 6.-Parameter level.
Controlled system simulator: 7.-Operation control levels.
Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process Control parameters:
variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10.
8.-Setting input channels.
All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks .
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for 9.-Setting output channels.
example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...). 10.-To use computer (PC)-based
Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables. configuration tools.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 11.- Scaling displays.
Dimensions (approx.)= Unit: 490x330x310 mm. Weight : 8 Kg.

units/automationsystems/automationcontrol/CECI.pdf
Page 86
6.2- Automatics
CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking
This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field 1.- Function of a digital industrial
buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system controller.
based on a simple application. 2.- Layout of a field bus system.
This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation
of a industrial process controller. To learn and to familiarise with the
Steel box. operation and structure of a process
2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface: control system under Profibus DP:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%. 3.- Controller parameter setting via field
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s. bus system.
Controller parameter setting via field bus system. 4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC). 5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)server
Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as function.
analog signals at lab jacks . 6.- Online controller parameters setting.
Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software. 7.- Master / slave assignment.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:
line recorder, oscilloscope, etc). 8.- To configure and display alarms.
Set of cables. 9.- Reading control variables and
Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. displaying them online.
Dimensions (approx.)= Unit: 490x330x310 mm. Weight : 12 Kg. 10.- Scaling displays.
11.- Bus configuration.
units/automationsystems/automationcontrol/CRCI.pdf
CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application

This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
based on Profibus DP. 1.- Operation and function of a digital
The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or industrial controller.
sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level). 2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a module.
Profibus DP interface (master).
Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology, 3.- Function of a digital input/output
system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication module.
protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc. 4.- Layout of a field bus system.
Steel box. 5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface: stations.
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s. 6.- Defining the bus technology with the
Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V. stations.
Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital 7.- Reading out and in, and online
inputs. Four digital outputs. displaying of analog and digital

Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog process variables.
inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V. 8.- Communication protocols.
Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).
Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V. 9.- To define tags.
Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and 10.- Familiarisation with the device
process control software. master file “DMF”.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example: 11.- OPC server.
chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables. 12.- Access to the OPC database from
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. the process control program.
units/automationsystems/automationcontrol/CEAB.pdf
CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer

Trainer for controller tuning. 1.- To use commonly applied tuning
This unit permits the interaction between controller and controlled system. rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
The objective is that the closed control loop, formed by the controller and the
2.- To study the difference between
controlled system, to show the desired optimum response.
With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be open and closed loop control.
practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability, 3.- Control loop comprising controller
disturbance and control response are demonstrated. and controlled system.
This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is 4.- To determine the system parameters.
simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can 5.- Closed-loop control system response.
recorder and analyse the time response using the software. 6.- Choice of optimum controller
The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer (PC) parameters.
across an interface using the configuration software. The controller and the
computer (PC) are connected by a data acquisition card with AD and DA 7.- Stability, steady state and transient
converters. response.
Steel box. 8.- Study and investigation of control
Configurable digital process controller, with interface: and disturbance response.
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s. 9.- Study of the stability of the closed
Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC). control loop.
Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order 10.- Learning methods and terminology
lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with involved in process control.
proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response,
11.- To adapt the process controller to
non-linearity and limitation.
Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of different controlled systems.
time response on computer (PC). Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. 12.- Use and practices with the
Set of cables. simulation software.
units/automationsystems/automationcontrol/CEAC.pdf
6.3- Regulation and Control
RYC. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation and Control
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2 3
Data Software for:
1 Unit: RYC. Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation 5 Manuals
and Control, including Control Interface

1 RYC Unit: 1.- S t u d y i n o p e n l o o p N º 1 :

Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Proportional Block.
Steel box. 2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrative
Block.
3 Modules of Controller of 1st Order. 3 Modules of Integrator.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple
2 Modules of Inverter Amplifier. Module of Inverter Reductor.
pole.
Module of Negative Zero. Module of Positive Zero. 4.- Study in open loop Nº4: Second
Module of Hysteresis. Module of Limiter. order plants.
Module of Controller of 2nd Order. Module of Adding. 5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non-linear
14 Capacitors from 1mF to 100mF. 6 Diodes. plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.
34 Operational Amplifiers. 33 Potentiometers. 6.- Study in open loop Nº6: Blocks
186 Resistances. 2 Transistors. Composition: Negative Zero and
On/Off switch. Fuse. Negative Pole.
Connector to PC. Control Interface. 7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
means of Quantitative Optimum 1st
order system.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
8.- Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by

Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. means of Quantitative Optimum 2nd
3 RYC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: order system
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, open and Other practical possibilities:
multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process parameters. Analog regulators procedure: (9-11):
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. 9.- First order filter.
Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification of the conditions during the process. 10.-Integral regulator.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 11.-Regulating I+P with phase advance
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. in the feedback.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg. 12.-Potentiometer adjustment.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/automationsystems/automationregulation/RYC.pdf
See NEW UNITS of the Area: 6.- Automation & Systems, in this link: www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=automationsystems&lang=en
Page 88
Summarized
Catalogue
two (2)
10. Process
Control
10.- Process Control
page
10.1. Process Control. Fundamentals. 90-94
10.2. Industrial Process Control. 95
www.edibon.com
Page 89
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
UCP. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with electronic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
1 2 3 ( )
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Control Interface Box
UCP-UB. Base Unit Board Software for each
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories Control
6 Manuals
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements
+ + + + + +
Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control
Software for Software for Flow Software for Level Software for Software for pH Software for Conductivity
Temperature Process Process Control ( ) Process Control ( ) Pressure Process Process Control ( ) and TDS
Control ( ) Control ( ) Process Control ( )
4.1 UCP-T. 4.2 UCP-C. 4.3 UCP-N. 4.4 UCP-PA. 4.5UCP-PH. 4.6 UCP-CT.
Set for Temperature Set for Flow Set for Level Set for Pressure Set for PH Set for Conductivity
Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control

Common items for all Process Control parameters: Temperature Process Control:
1 UCP-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that 4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank 7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass. 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and 10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
valves of the upper tank. Proportional valve: motorized control valve. 12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCP/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one or 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
several sets. 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 27.- Level sensor calibration.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
Inputs/Outputs. 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
4.1
UCP-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison 38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows 39.- pH control loops (P).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
4.2
UCP-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
Turbine type flow sensor. 43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
4.3
UCP-N. Set for Level Process Control: 45.- pH sensor calibration.
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
4.4
UCP-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control: 48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
Pressure sensor. 49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
4.5 UCP-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
4.6 UCP-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control: 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCP-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP.pdf
Page 90
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
1 2 3 ( )
UCPCN-UB. Control Interface BoxData Acquisition Computer Control
Board Software for each
Base Unit Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories Control
6 Manuals
+ + + + + +
4.1 UCPCN-T. 4.2UCPCN-C. 4.3UCPCN-N. 4.4 UCPCN-PA. 4.5 UCPCN-PH. 4.6 UCPCN-CT.

1 UCPCN-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
one or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve. 12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one 14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
or several sets. 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves Level Process Control:
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 19.- Level control loops (Manual).

keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 23.- Level control loops (P+D).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Pressure Process Control:
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital 28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
Inputs/Outputs. 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison pH Process Control:
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows 37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 39.- pH control loops (P).
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
Turbine type flow sensor. 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control: 43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Pressure sensor. 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control: 49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
Control: 54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 56.- TDS control loops (P).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ 62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
1 2 3 ( )
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Control Interface Box
UCPCV-UB. Board Software for each
Base Unit 5 Cables and Accessories Set for Process
Control
6 Manuals
+ + + + + +
4.1 UCPCV-T. 4.2 UCPCV-C. 4.3UCPCV-N. 4.4UCPCV-PA. 4.5UCPCV-PH. 4.6 UCPCV-CT.

1 UCPCV-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
one or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and Flow Process Control:
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box). 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one 14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
or several sets. 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 23.- Level control loops (P+D).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 27.- Level sensor calibration.
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Pressure Process Control:
Inputs/Outputs. 28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 39.- pH control loops (P).
Turbine type flow sensor. 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control: 42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). 45.- pH sensor calibration.
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control: Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
Pressure sensor. 46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process 52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control: 53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 56.- TDS control loops (P).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 92
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):

The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them Incorrect Calibration:
and, if possible, solve them. 1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections: 2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
Faults affecting the sensors measure: 3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to 4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
calibrate the affected sensor through the Non Linearity:
values collection. 5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the 6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is 7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will 8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the Interchange of actuators:
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be 9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits. them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.) Reduction of an actuator response:
- Actuators canals interchange at any time 10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
during the program execution. half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
This error does not admit any solution. the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog 50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
outputs, we can get an response with Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
a fraction of what it should be, either with a 11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...). AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
Faults in the controls execution: others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls. the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it (Affected sensor: pH).
should be ON is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
operating logic. 12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
response. sensor).
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the The action of some controls is annulled:
reduction or increase of the action really applied 13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
to the actuator, and the consequent control (Proportional-Derivative).
instability of the control. The student should notify 14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled. PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/ are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP.pdf
UCP-P. Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2 3 4

1 Unit: UCP-P. Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air) 6 Manuals

Items supplied as standard 1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
1 UCP-P. Unit: of different pressure sensor.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2.- Calibration processes.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
the hysteresis curve.
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
4.- I/P converter calibration.
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous type.
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real 6.- Determination of the influence of the
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered flow rate of the conduction.
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the 7.- Pressure control in conduction using
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, a PID controller.
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and 8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
the third one in the control software. 9.- Characteristics of a proportional
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: and integral control (P+I).
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 10.- Characteristics of a proportional
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. and derivative control (P+D).
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
PID controller.
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
time.
PID controller, flow control.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 5 Kg.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer

Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the
study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial To study methods and terminology of
process controller. process control:
Steel box. 1.-Closed loop control.
Configurable digital controller:
2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. 2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s. 3.-To study the step response.
Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on 4.-Reference variable step.
computer (PC).
Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V. To learn and to familiarise with a process
Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2 controller:
voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V. 5.-Configuration level.
Controlled system simulator:
Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process 6.-Parameter level.
variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10. 7.-Operation control levels.
All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks . Control parameters:
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for
example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...). 8.-Setting input channels.
Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables. 9.-Setting output channels.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 10.-To use computer (PC) - based
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm. Weight : 8 Kg. configuration tools.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ 11.- Scaling displays.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CECI.pdf
CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking

This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field
buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system 1.- Function of a digital industrial
based on a simple application. controller.
This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation 2.- Layout of a field bus system.
of a industrial process controller. To learn and to familiarise with the
Steel box. operation and structure of a process
2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface: control system under Profibus DP:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%. 3.- Controller parameter setting via field
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s. bus system.
Controller parameter setting via field bus system.
2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC). 4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as 5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)
analog signals at lab jacks . server function.
Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software. 6.- Online controller parameters
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example: setting.
line recorder, oscilloscope, etc). 7.- Master / slave assignment.
Set of cables. 8.- To configure and display alarms.
Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 9.- Reading control variables and
Dimensions (approx.)=490x330x310 mm. Weight : 12 Kg.
displaying them online.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ 10.- Scaling displays.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CRCI.pdf 11.- Bus configuration.
CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application

This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
based on Profibus DP. 1.- Operation and function of a digital
The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or industrial controller.
sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level).
Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a 2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
Profibus DP interface (master). module.
Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology, 3.- Function of a digital input/output
system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication
protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc. module.
Steel box. 4.- Layout of a field bus system.
Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface: 5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s. stations.

Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V. 6.- Defining the bus technology with the
Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital stations.
inputs. Four digital outputs.
Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog 7.- Reading out and in, and online
inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V. displaying of analog and digital
Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC). process variables.
Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V.
Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and 8.- Communication protocols.
process control software. 9.- To define tags.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example: 10.- Familiarisation with the device
chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables. master file “DMF”.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 11.- OPC server.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm. Weight : 12 Kg. 12.- Access to the OPC database from
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ the process control program.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAB.pdf
CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer

Trainer for controller tuning.This unit permits the interaction between
controller and controlled system. The objective is that the closed control 1.- To use commonly applied tuning
loop, formed by the controller and the controlled system, to show the desired
optimum response. rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be 2.- To study the difference between
practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability, open and closed loop control.
disturbance and control response are demonstrated. 3.- Control loop comprising controller
This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is and controlled system.
simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can 4.- To determine the system parameters.
recorder and analyse the time response using the software. 5.- Closed-loop control system
The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer response.
(PC).The controller and the computer (PC) are connected by a data 6.- Choice of optimum controller
acquisition card with AD and DA converters.
Steel box. parameters.
Configurable digital process controller, with interface: 7.- Stability, steady state and transient
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%. response.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s. 8.- Study and investigation of control
Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC). and disturbance response.
Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order
lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with 9.- Study of the stability of the closed
proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response, control loop.
non-linearity and limitation. 10.- Learning methods and terminology
Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of involved in process control.
time response on computer (PC). 11.- To adapt the process controller to
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. different controlled systems.
Dimensions (approx.)= 330x330x145 mm. Weight : 5 Kg. 12.- Use and practices with the
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ simulation software.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAC.pdf
Page 94
10.2- Industrial Process Control
CPIC. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module
(Flow, Temperature, Level and Pressure)
Always included
Main Unit in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
Service Module used
2 3 4
- Data Management

6 Manuals
1 Unit: CPIC. Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
Service Module. (Flow, Temperature, Level and Pressure).

1CPIC. Unit: 1.- Familiarisation with the different 29.- Level control loop (P+D).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar components of the system and 30.- Level control loop (P+I+D).
distribution that the elements in the real unit. Main metallic elements in their symbolic representation. 31.- Adjust of level controller constants
Identification of components and (minimum area or reduction rate).
stainless steel.
description of their functions. 32.- Adjust of level controller constants
Main Unit contains the following elements:
2.- The auxiliary systems: air and hot (minimum disturbance criterion).
2 pneumatics valves with Cv : 0.25. I/P actuator of 0.2 to 1.0 bar
water supply. 33.- Adjust of level controller constants
for one electric signal of 4 to 20 mA. 2 motorised valves with 3.- Flow Sensors calibration. (minimum width criterion)
2000N. 12 solenoid valves, normally closed. 2 solenoid 4.- Temperature sensors calibration. 34.- Search of simple shortcomings in level
valves, normally opened. 5.- Level sensors calibration. control loop.
3 differential pressure sensors; 2 of them with range of 0-1000 mm 6.- Pressure sensors calibration. 35.- Pressure control loop (on/off).
H2O, and the other one with 0-10 bar. 5 temperature sensors. 7.- Flow control loop (on/off). 36.- Pressure control loop (proportional).
1 level sensor. 4 level switches. 1 water pump, with 7 bar of 8.- Flow control loop (proportional). 37.- Pressure control loop (P+I).
maximum pressure and 106 l/min. of maximum water flow. 9.- Flow control loop (P+I). 38.- Pressure control loop (P+D).
Service Module contains the following elements: 10. Flow control loop (P+D). 39.- Pressure control loop (P+I+D).
Compressor unit with 10 bar as maximum pressure. Water heater with 11.- Flow control loop (P+I+D). 40.- Adjust of pressure controller constants
80 l. as maximum capacity. Electrical resistance of 1.2 KW. Water 12.- Adjust of flow controller constants (minimum area or reduction rate).
supply system: Water tank with capacity for 400 litres, water pump with (Ziegler-Nichols). 41.- Adjust of pressure controller constants
3.0 bar and 2500 l/h. 13.- Adjust of flow controller constants (minimum disturbance criterion).
2 CPIC/CIB. Control Interface Box : (reaction curves). 42.- Adjust of pressure controller constants
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are 14.- Search of simple shortcomings in the (minimum width criterion).
permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of loop of flow control. 43.- Search of simple shortcomings in the
all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in 15.- Temperature control loop (on/off). pressure control loop.
the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can 16.- Tem p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l l o o p 44.- The use of the controllers in cascade,
be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to (proportional). exemplified with the level/flow control
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of 17.- Temperature control loop (P+I). loop.
modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at any moment 18.- Temperature control loop (P+D). 45.- Adjust of cascade control constants

during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and 19.- Te m p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l l o o p (minimum area or reduction rate).
in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: (P+I+D). 46.- Adjust of cascade control constants
mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface and the third one in the 20.- Adjust of temperature controller (minimum disturbance criterion).
control software. constants (minimum area or 47.- Adjust of cascade control constants
reduction rate). (minimum width criterion).
21.- Adjust of temperature controller 48.- Search of simple shortcomings in
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a
constants (minimum disturbance cascade control loop.
computer slot. 16 analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog
criterion ). 49.- Practical operation of the control plant
outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
22.- Adjust of temperature controller to some wanted specific values:
4 C P I C / C C S O F. C o m p u t e r C o n t r o l + D a t a A c q u i s i t i o n + D a t a
constants (minimum width transfers without interferences.
Management Software: criterion). 50.- Starting-up and operation of the plant
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, 23.- S t u d y o f t h e r e t a r d s f o r WITHOUT supervision.
comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 speed/distance, exemplified 51-69.- Practices with PLC.
data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state through the temperature control
and the graphic representation in real time. loop.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 24.- Study of the energy lost in the
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. temperature control loop.
Dimensions (approx.)= 25.- Search of simple shortcomings in
-Main Unit: 5000x1500x2500 mm. Weight:1000 Kg. temperature control loop.
-Service Module: 2000x1500x2000 mm. Weight:200 Kg. 26.- Level control loop (on/off).
-Control Interface: 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 20 Kg. 27.- Level control loop (proportional).
28.- Level control loop (P+I).
processcontrol/industrial/CPIC.pdf
Other available units

CPIC-C. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Flow).
CPIC-T. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Temperature).
CPIC-N. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Level).
CPIC-P. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Pressure).
@

Brosur EDIBON Lab Teknik Elektro PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Brosur EDIBON Lab Teknik Elektro PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Summarized

2.1. Basic Electronics. 5-12

3.1. Analog Communications &

4.1. Basic Electricity. 37-56

5.1. Energy Simulation. 74

6. Systems & Automatics page 83

10. Process Control page 89

10.1. Process Control Fundamentals. 90-94

2.1. Basic Electronics. 5-12

2 Modules 1 Power Supply 2 Modules

3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System

INS/SOF. Instructor Software

(M4) 4 LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (M14)

5 EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/

DAB. Data acquisition board

EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and

Some available Modules

More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)

There are two choices for suppling the modules:

M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits

M16. Electric Networks PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

M17. Electromagnetism PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES

More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)

M5. Power Supplies

M7. Operational Amplifiers

M9. Power Electronics

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)

M10. Digital Systems and Converters

M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals

M12. Basic Combinational Circuits

M13. Basic Sequential Circuits

M15. Development Module

More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)

1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer. 3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.

M43. Applications of Temperature

M44. Applications of Light

M45. Linear Position and Force

M-46. Environmental Measurements

M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control

M-48. Sounds Measurements

M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure

More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)

M60. Analog/Digital Converters

1.- Binary Slope Converter. 5.- Flash Converter.

2.- Integrated converter.

3.- Simple Slope Converter.

4.- Double Slope Converter.

M-61. Digital/Analog Converters

M-65. Control and Regulation

Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities

M-99. Expansion Board

More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)

With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor

M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module

4 LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)

LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)

5 EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System

This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF: